JP6105528B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as variable display) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value is played. There is something configured to give to the person.

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display result determined in advance as a display result of a variable symbol display that is started in the variable display unit based on the establishment of the start condition after the game medium passes through the start area. Is derived and displayed, a “big hit (specific gaming state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine, information for determining whether or not to make a specific display result for variable display that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the start area is stored as hold information, Some display hold specific information corresponding to hold information.

  For example, Patent Document 1 refers to numerical data extracted when a game medium passes through the start area before starting variable display based on the game medium passing through the start area (start winning award). A gaming machine configured to determine whether the display result is a specific display result and to set the display mode of the hold specific information as a special mode based on the determination result. In addition, it is possible to execute a continuous effect in which the effect image has a special aspect in a plurality of continuous variable displays.

JP 2012-254201 A (paragraph 0195, FIGS. 53 to 56)

  However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to appropriately increase the player's expectation by both the display mode of the hold specific information and the continuous performance.

  The present invention has been made based on such a background, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably enhancing a player's expectation by both the display mode of the hold specific information and the continuous performance. It is to provide.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display of the identification information (for example, the first special symbol variation display, the second special symbol variation display, the production symbol variation display), and is determined in advance as a display result. A game control means for controlling the progress of a game, wherein the game machine controls a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived. (For example, a game control microcomputer 560) and effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the execution of the effect based on a command transmitted from the game control means. For the variable display that has not yet been started, the hold storage means (for example, the first hold memory) that can be stored as the hold information (for example, the first hold memory, the second hold memory). A storage buffer, a second hold storage buffer) and hold display means for displaying hold specific information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold storage means (for example, step S1010 in the production control microcomputer 100 (FIG. 33) ), S1023 (FIG. 34), S1033 (FIG. 34), S1043 (FIG. 37), S1047 (FIG. 37), S1060 (FIG. 39), S1020 (FIG. 60), S1023A (FIG. 61), and S1033A (FIG. 61). And a start time determining means for determining whether or not the display result is a specific display result when variable display is started (for example, a game control microcomputer for starting variable symbol variable display) Whether the display result is a big hit or not based on the big hit determination random number in 560 (CPU 56). And the process of steps S220 to S222 (FIG. 19) in the game control microcomputer 560 for determining whether or not a specific display result is obtained before determination by the start time determination unit. A specific command based on the end of variable display, a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating a variable display time, a predetermined command (for example, a background designation command, a display result designation command), and the like. For example, command transmission means (for example, steps S51A, S60, S92 in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting a symbol variation designation command, a symbol confirmation designation command, a customer waiting demonstration designation command, a jackpot start designation command, a variation pattern command). , S102 to S111, S133, S90 The state control means (for example, step S132 in the game control microcomputer 560) that controls to the first game state (for example, the normal state) and the second game state (for example, the probability change state, the short time state). , S144, S167, S169, S170), and the effect control means executes variable display based on the determination result of the start time determination means and the variable display time command (for example, effect) Based on the determination by the pre-start determination means based on the effect symbol variation start processing (FIG. 43, FIG. 63) in the control microcomputer 100 and the pending specific information corresponding to the variable display subject to the determination. A table in which the display mode is a special mode (for example, the “heat” character of the first special mode or the flame effect of the second special mode) It is possible to execute a continuous effect in a mode control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S1023 (FIG. 34), S1043 (FIG. 37), and S1023A (FIG. 61) in the effect control microcomputer 100) and multiple variable displays. Continuous effect execution means (for example, steps S1055, S1056, S1058, and S1059 of the background change effect determination process (FIG. 39) in the effect control microcomputer 100, and steps S2041 and S2043 of the process table selection process (FIG. 46), Including step S2026 of the variation start time determination process (FIG. 64) and step S2063 and step S2065 of the process table selection process (FIG. 67), and the display mode of the pending specific information is a special mode Is A continuous effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where the display mode of the hold specific information is not a special mode (for example, a step of background change effect determination processing with reference to the background change effect determination table of FIG. 40 in the effect control microcomputer 100) S1050 (FIG. 39), referring to the second variation start time determination table of FIG. 66, a portion for executing the process of step S2024 (FIG. 64) of the variation start time determination process), the variable display execution means is the first gaming state When the variable display time command is normally received when the control is performed, the variable display is executed even if the predetermined command is not normally received (for example, in the case of N in step S2601, the display result) Steps S8001 to S8011 are executed regardless of whether or not the designation command and the background designation command are received), while the second game When the variable display time command is normally received when the state is controlled, the variable display is executed on the condition that the predetermined command is normally received (for example, Y in step S2601) On the condition that the display result designation command and the background designation command have been received (Y in Step S2602, Y in S2604), Steps S8001 to S8011 are executed, and the predetermined command has not been received normally and variable display has not been executed. When the specific command is received, the identification information is replaced (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs steps S2403 and S2407 and then performs step S803). According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold specific information is a special mode, the continuous effect is executed at a higher rate than when the display mode of the hold specific information is not a special mode. The player's expectation can be suitably enhanced by both the continuous performance and the display mode of the hold specific information. In addition, processing according to the situation can be realized. Even when the variable display is not executed, the displayed identification information can be replaced based on a command received later.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table and a big hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation | variation corresponding | compatible display area in a display image, the 1st reserved memory number display part, and the 2nd reserved memory number display part. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process in the special symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the special aspect display of a holding | maintenance change effect, and the special aspect display of a background change effect. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning time determination process. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a determination table at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect flag table. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding change effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a background change effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a background change effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during fluctuation non-execution. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a process table selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows a mode extension determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect. It is a timing chart in case a predetermined command is not received normally. It is a timing chart in the pattern which received the symbol fixed designation | designated command normally. It is a timing chart in the pattern which did not receive a symbol fixed designation | designated command normally, but received the customer waiting demonstration designation | designated command normally. It is a timing chart in the pattern which did not receive a symbol fixed designation | designated command normally but received the following fluctuation pattern command normally. It is a timing chart in the pattern which did not receive a symbol fixed designation | designated command normally but received the jackpot start designation | designated command normally. It is a figure which shows the open designation | designated command table in a modification. In the variation, for each of the first probability variation jackpot and the second probability variation jackpot, in the jackpot gaming state, the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening executed, the command being opened, the round number display on the effect display device, and It is a timing chart explaining the relationship of the control aspect of the outgoing ball display in an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch effect determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning time determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the winning time determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change start time determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st fluctuation | variation start time determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd variation start time determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process table selection process in 2nd Embodiment.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, it is displayed in the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the deviation). The For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is probable jackpot or normal jackpot). Also, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. Even if the number of rounds per jackpot is the same, for example, the jackpot opening time per round is short (for example, 1 second), and a jackpot that cannot be expected to win a game ball in the jackpot. If the opening time of the big prize opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big prize opening substantially, to the big prize opening substantially The display color may be varied depending on whether or not a game ball can be expected to win. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that cannot be expected and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, The display color may be varied depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win the mouth.

  When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, it is displayed in a display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (a display color different from the disparity). The For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is probable jackpot or normal jackpot). Also, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. Even if the number of rounds per jackpot is the same, for example, the jackpot opening time per round is short (for example, 1 second), and a jackpot that cannot be expected to win a game ball in the jackpot. If the opening time of the big prize opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big prize opening substantially, to the big prize opening substantially The display color may be varied depending on whether or not a game ball can be expected to win. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that cannot be expected and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, The display color may be varied depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win the mouth.

  The display colors when the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off are different from the background image (for example, black) in order to prevent the display colors from being assimilated with the background image when the lights are turned off. It is desirable to be.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls is paid out to the player. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player may be different depending on whether the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 or when the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14. . For example, one game ball may be paid out to the player when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13. As described above, when the number of prize balls is reduced with respect to one win, the game ball can be configured to easily win the first start winning opening 13 instead. That is, the player can enjoy the game because the number of prize balls to be paid out by one winning is reduced, but the first special symbol is easily displayed in a variable manner. However, in this case, the expected value for winning a prize ball in the reeds is less than a predetermined value (for example, 6400 pieces), and the jackpot probability that the display result of variable symbol special display is a big hit is a predetermined value (for example, , Less than 1/260). In addition, during the consecutive games, for example, a period from when the big hit game is started until it is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game, until the probability change state controlled after the big hit game is started (after the big hit game is finished) ( The period until the control of the short-time state or the normal state is started), or the period from the start of the big hit game until the end of the probability change state or the short-time state controlled after the big hit game (the control of the normal state is started) (Until). The big hit probability being less than a predetermined value (for example, 1/260) means that the percentage of big hits is higher than when the big hit probability is a predetermined value (for example, a ratio of 1/100). Is a big hit).

  Further, even when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, one prize ball may be paid out to the player. However, in this case as well, it is desirable to appropriately adjust the winning probability of winning a prize ball in the retreat and the jackpot probability that the display result of the variable symbol special display is a big hit.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  Further, a variation corresponding display area 180 is provided at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In the fluctuation corresponding display area 180, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started, the fluctuation corresponding display area 180 corresponds to the fluctuation display to be executed. The fluctuation correspondence display is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, a normal mode in which no characters or effects are applied, or a specific display mode in which characters or effects are applied). In other words, the variation correspondence display suggests that the variation display is being executed.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and is specified when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Controlled to gaming state. The specific display result is a predetermined display result. For example, in the present embodiment, there is a jackpot symbol. The specific game state is to change the variable winning means that can be changed between the first state advantageous to the player and the second state unfavorable to the player to the first state. There is a big hit gaming state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that can be changed to a closed state is opened. For example, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the specific display result, the big hit game state is controlled as the specific game state. In each specific game state, the open / closed version that is in the closed state is controlled to be in the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening that becomes the winning area is in the open state. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided with a large winning opening LED 20A that is lit and displayed when a game ball is won.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, there is a case where the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is shifted to a high base state where the opening time and the number of times of opening are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when 5R probability variation big hit, 15R probability variation big hit, or sudden probability variation big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball becomes easy to start and win (that is, a special symbol display). Transition to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that variable display execution conditions in the devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start. Further, in this embodiment, even when the 5R normal big hit or the 15R normal big hit is reached, the high base state is transferred although not shifted to the high probability state.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, by changing to the short time state (special symbol short time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and staging symbols is shortened, the variation time of special symbols and staging symbols is shortened. The frequency at which the production symbol changes is increased (in other words, the reserved memory is quickly digested), and the situation in which an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side and the big prize opening LED 20A provided at the big prize opening via the lamp driver board 35. And the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the special prize opening LED 20A based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates a sound “voice or sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplification circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 sets the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to the volume set by the volume 706. A sound signal amplified to a level corresponding to the sound number is output to the speaker 27. Control data corresponding to the sound number data is stored in the sound data ROM 704. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is stored for a predetermined period (for example, This is a collection of data indicating the output form of sound effects or voices in a time-series manner during the production symbol variation period).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S5). By the processing in step S5, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S6), and proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of payout prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball-out flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for performing the above.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S15).

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 first disables the interrupt (step S17), executes the initial value random number update process (step S18a) and the display random number update process (step S18b), The interrupt is permitted again (step S19). That is, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt disabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and interrupts enable state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are finished. To.

  The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot or whether to shift the gaming state to a probable state) Initial value of the count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a probability variation determining random number for generating, a normal random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as an effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the gaming machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 8. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  In addition, when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed by the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process also in the timer interrupt process described later (that is, the timer This is because the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process), so as to avoid conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A timer interrupt process that is activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) that detects whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether the power-on signal has been turned on) (step S20). Then, the CPU 56 inputs detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 through the switch circuit 58, and detects the input of each switch. (Switch process: Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a display control process for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a winning notification process for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning at the big winning opening and performing an abnormal winning notification (step S24).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating a random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control (determination random number update process: step S25). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect symbol command control process: step S30). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as a start port signal supplied to the hall management computer, a symbol determination number 1 signal, a symbol determination number 2 signal, a jackpot 1 to 3 signal, a time reduction signal, and the like. (Step S31).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S32). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port. (Step S34: Output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S35).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S36). Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may make it do.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S39), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S39 (excluding steps S31 and 33) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Eventually, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. In this embodiment, a game effect according to the variation pattern of the effect symbol is executed.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3 is used as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach out”. A pattern is available. The variation time of non-reach PA1-1 is 15 seconds, and the variation time of non-reach PA1-2 is 8 seconds. On the other hand, since the fluctuation time of the non-reach PA1-3 is as short as 2 seconds, it may be referred to as a fluctuation display mode of “shortening fluctuation”.

  Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach out”, the variation patterns of normal PA2-1, super PA3-1 and super PA3-2 are as follows. It is prepared. These are the fluctuation patterns related to the reach fluctuation display accompanied by the reach effect.

  Normal PA2-1 with a “normal reach” reach production has a special symbol (production design) variation time of 20 seconds, and the word “reach!” Is displayed as the reach production. Without being developed in any way, a symbol that is not a final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  Super PA3-1 with “Super Reach” reach production has a special symbol (production design) variation time of 40 seconds, and “Reach!” Is displayed as the reach production, and it has a story in the reach state. Story production is performed (development to Super Reach A). Then, as the story effect ends without a specific ending, a symbol that is not the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  Super PA3-2 with “Super Reach” reach production has a special symbol (direction design) variation time of 60 seconds, and “Leach!” Is displayed as the reach production. A battle effect in which a character battles is performed (development to Super Reach B). Then, as the ally character loses to the enemy character and the battle is ended, a symbol that is not the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  In addition, as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit”, variation patterns of normal PB2-1, super PB3-1, and super PB3-2 are prepared. These are the fluctuation patterns related to the reach fluctuation display accompanied by the reach effect.

  Normal PB2-1 with a “normal reach” reach production has a special design (production design) variation time of 28 seconds, and the character “reach!” Is displayed as the reach production. However, with the execution of the jackpot effect in which the characters “Big jackpot!” Are displayed, the jackpot symbol (normal jackpot symbol or probability variation jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol.

  Super PB3-1 with “Super Reach” reach production has a special symbol (production design) variation time of 48 seconds, and “Reach!” Is displayed as the reach production, and it has a story in the reach state. Story production is performed (development to Super Reach A). Then, as the story effect ends with a specific ending, a big hit symbol (usually big hit symbol or probability variable big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol.

  Super PB3-2 with “Super Reach” reach production has a special symbol (production design) variation time of 68 seconds, and “Reach!” Is displayed as the reach production. A battle effect in which a character battles is performed (development to Super Reach B). Then, as the ally character wins the enemy character and the battle is ended, a big hit symbol (normal big hit symbol or probability variation big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol.

  In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “suddenly probable big hit”, variation patterns of normal PC 2-1, super PC 3-1 and super PC 3-2 are prepared. These are the fluctuation patterns related to the reach fluctuation display accompanied by the reach effect. In the following explanation, re-variation means that the effect symbol variation display is executed again after temporarily halting the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the effect symbol variation display until the display result is derived and displayed. That is.

  Normal PC2-1 with a “normal reach” reach production has a special symbol (production design) variation time of 35 seconds, and the character “reach!” Is displayed as the reach production. Is displayed. Subsequently, the sudden change in probability big hit effect in which the effect symbol is re-variable and the characters “surprise!” Is displayed is executed, and the sudden probability change big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol.

  The super PC 3-1 with “Super Reach” reach production has a special design (production design) variation time of 55 seconds, and “Reach!” Is displayed as the reach production and has a story in the reach state. Story production is performed (development to Super Reach A). Then, once the story effect ends without a specific ending, the off symbol is temporarily displayed. After that, the production symbol is re-variable and the story production ends with a specific ending, and as a final stop symbol, a suddenly probable big hit symbol is derived and displayed.

  Super PC3-2 with “Super Reach” reach production has a special design (production design) variation time of 75 seconds, and “Reach!” Is displayed as the reach production. A battle effect in which a character battles is performed (development to Super Reach B). Then, once the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the battle is ended, the off symbol is temporarily displayed. Then, as the design symbol re-varies and the teammate character reversely wins against the enemy character and the battle ends, a suddenly probable big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the effect data (process table) corresponding to the variation time is provided for each variation pattern of the effect symbol. The production control microcomputer 100 stores production data corresponding to each variation pattern command, and based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 when the variation display of the special symbol is started. The effect display device 9 or the like executes an effect corresponding to the variation pattern command.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of big hit (5R normal big hit, 15R normal big hit, 5R positive variable big hit, 15R positive variable big hit, sudden positive variable big hit which will be described later)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. In this example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and are divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach.

  In this embodiment, in the case of deviation, non-reach X1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach or re-variation and does not involve shortening variation, and is accompanied by a shortening variation without reach or re-variation. Non-reach X2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern, Normal X1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern which does not involve re-variation with normal reach, and a variation pattern which includes a variation pattern which does not involve re-variation with super reach It is classified into the super X1, which is the type.

  In this embodiment, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, a normal Y1 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern that does not involve re-variation with normal reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not involve re-change with super reach. It is classified into a super pattern Y1 which is a variation pattern type to be included. Further, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, normal Y2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach and re-variation, and super Y2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with super-reach and re-variation It is classified.

  In step S25 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 based on the occurrence of the effective start winning to the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14, and uses the extracted value as a jackpot determination random number (random R). First, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. A symbol designating command and a variation category command to be described later are transmitted according to the determination result. Then, even when the variable display based on the effective start winning is started, it is determined whether or not the read jackpot determination random number value matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. When the determination random number value matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 6A, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probable big hit, and a sudden probable big hit described later). Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 8C shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination table is “15 round (15R) normal jackpot” based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , "5 round (5R) normal jackpot", "15 round (15R) probability variation jackpot", "5 round (5R) probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" is referred to to determine It is a table. In the following description, “15R normal big hit” and “5R normal big hit” may be referred to as “normal big hit”, and “15R positive change big hit” and “5R positive change big hit” and “sudden probability change big hit” are “probable big hit”. May be called. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, five judgment values are assigned to “sudden probability variation big hit” in the big hit type judgment table (for the first special symbol). In the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol), one judgment value for “suddenly probable big hit” is determined. Is assigned (determined as a sudden probability variation jackpot at a ratio of 1/40). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “suddenly probable big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and “suddenly probable big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table (that is, the first special symbol big hit type determination table is assigned). Only when the variation display of one special symbol is performed, it may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the types of jackpots are “15 rounds (15R) normal jackpot”, “5 rounds (5R) normal jackpots”, “15 rounds (15R) There are "probable big hits", "5 round (5R) probable big hits", and "sudden probable big hits". In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 5 rounds, and 2 rounds. However, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. It is not restricted to what was shown with the form of. For example, a 10R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 10-round jackpot game or a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 7-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, the big hit types are “15 round (15R) normal big hit”, “5 round (5R) normal big hit”, “15 round (15R) positive chance big hit”, and “5 round (5R) positive big hit”. However, it is not limited to five types, but, for example, six or more types of big hits may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than five types, for example, only four types, three types, or two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “15 round (15R) normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a 15-round jackpot gaming state and transitions to a low probability / high base state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Then, after the transition to the low probability / high base state, when the special symbol variation display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the low probability / high base state is finished and the low probability / low base state is obtained. . Note that the low probability / high base state is also ended when the next big hit occurs before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times.

  “5 rounds (5R) normal big hit” is a normal big hit with a different number of rounds than “15R normal big hit”, and it is controlled to 5 rounds of big hit gaming state, and low probability / high after the big hit gaming state ends It is a big hit to shift to the base state. Then, after the transition to the low probability / high base state, when the special symbol variation display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the low probability / high base state is finished and the low probability / low base state is obtained. . Note that the low probability / high base state is also ended when the next big hit occurs before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times.

  The “15 round (15R) probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state and shifts to the high probability / high base state after the big hit gaming state ends. The high probability / high base state continues until the next big hit occurs.

  “5 rounds (5R) probable big hit” is a probable big hit with a different number of rounds than “15R probable big hit”, which is controlled to a five round big hit gaming state and has a high probability / high after the big hit gaming state ends. It is a big hit to shift to the base state. The high probability / high base state continues until the next big hit occurs.

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times the winning a prize opening is open compared to other big hits (“15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R positive big hit”, and “5R positive big hit”). This is a jackpot that is allowed up to a small number of times (in this embodiment, two 0.1 second releases). In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability big hit” and “5R probability big hit” have a long opening time of 29 seconds per round, In the “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win the big winning opening during the big hit game. In this embodiment, the high probability / high base state is entered after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state. The high probability / high base state continues until the next big hit occurs.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of jackpot types having different advantages for the player during the period in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled. Specifically, the number of game media that can be acquired by the player is larger in the case of 15R normal big hit and 15R probability big hit than in the case of 5R normal big hit, 5R probability big hit and sudden probability big hit. That is, it can be said that the 15R big hit (15R probability variable big hit and 15R normal big hit) is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the big hit of 5R or less (5R normal big hit, 5R positive variable big hit, and sudden probability variable big hit) in the big hit gaming state. Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of jackpot types having different advantages for the player after the jackpot gaming state ends. Specifically, 15R probability change big hit and 5R probability change big hit and sudden probability change big hit are compared to 15R normal big hit and 5R normal big hit, and are controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state, thereby generating the next big hit. It's easy to do. That is, it can be said that the probability change big hit (15R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit and sudden probability change big hit) is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the normal big hit (15R normal big hit and 5R normal big hit) after the big hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the 5R big hit (5R positive variation big hit and 5R normal big hit) and the 15R big hit (15R positive variation big hit and 15R normal big hit) have the same opening time of the big winning opening per round. An example is shown in which the number of times the winning opening is opened is not limited to this type, but there are a plurality of jackpot types that share the same number of times the opening of the big winning opening but have different opening times of the big winning opening. May be. For example, the number of times of opening the grand prize opening is 15 times, of which 5 times are the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening is 29 seconds and the remaining 10 times are the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening is 0.1 seconds. There may be a jackpot type (so-called real five-round jackpot) and a jackpot type (so-called real 15-round jackpot) having a maximum winning opening time of 29 seconds for all 15 times. In such a case, it can be said that the latter (substantial 15 rounds jackpot) is a more advantageous jackpot for the player than the former (substantial 5 rounds jackpot) in the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state. As described above, the advantage in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state is not determined only by the number of times the big winning opening is opened, but is based on the period during which the game ball can win the big winning opening.

  The jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8B used when the first special symbol is displayed is a numerical value to be compared with a random value of “15R normal jackpot”, “15R probability variable jackpot”. ”,“ 5R probability variation big hit ”, and“ sudden probability variation big hit ”, respectively, are set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  The jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8C used when the second special symbol is displayed is a numerical value to be compared with a random 1 value, which is “5R normal jackpot”, “15R probability variation jackpot”. ”,“ 5R probability variation big hit ”, and“ sudden probability variation big hit ”, respectively, are set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  In this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the determination value is set so that the big hit type is not determined to be the 5R normal big hit, but it is not limited to such a form. The determination value may be set so that the big hit type may be determined as a 5R normal big hit when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the determination value is set so that the big hit type is not determined to be the 15R normal big hit. Instead, the determination value may be set so that the big hit type may be determined as 15R normal big hit when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  FIGS. 9A and 9B are explanatory diagrams showing a deviation variation pattern type determination table. The variation pattern type determination table for detachment indicates that the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types based on a random number (random 2) for deciding the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is out of the design. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. Among these, FIG. 9A shows a variation pattern type determination table for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 9B shows a variation pattern for loss that is used when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, and when the gaming state is the high base state. A type determination table is shown.

  9A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type, and includes non-reach X1 (1 to 169). A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal X1 (170 to 239) and super X1 (240 to 251) is set. In the deviation variation pattern type determination table of FIG. 9B, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, and non-reach X2 (1 to 219). A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal X1 (220 to 239) and super X1 (240 to 251) is set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of deviation, if the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 169, the total pending storage It can be seen that, regardless of the number or gaming state, at least a variable display ("non-reach out") without a reach state is executed. If the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 239, at least variation display with “normal reach” (“out of normal reach”) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage and the gaming state. I understand that. Further, if the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 240 to 251, the variation accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) regardless of the total number of pending storage and the gaming state. It can be seen that the display ("superreach off") is executed.

  10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit variation pattern type determination table. The jackpot variation pattern type determination table determines the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when the variation display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol. ) Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types.

  The big hit variation pattern type determination table of FIG. 10 (A) is a table used when the big hit type is a 15R normal big hit and a 5R normal big hit, and is compared with the value of a random number (random 2) for determining the variable pattern type. A determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of normal Y1 (1-49) and super Y1 (50-251) is set. The big hit variation pattern type determination table of FIG. 10 (B) is a table used when the big hit type is 15R probability variation big hit and 5R probability variation big hit, and is compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination. A determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of normal Y1 (1-49) and super Y1 (50-251) is set. The jackpot variation pattern type determination table in FIG. 10C is a table used when the jackpot type suddenly becomes a probable variation jackpot, and is a numerical value (random 2) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination. A determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of normal Y2 (1 to 49) and super Y2 (50 to 251) is set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A, 10B, and 10C, if the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 49, at least regardless of the jackpot type, at least It can be seen that the variable display with normal reach is executed. It can also be seen that if the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 50 to 251, the variation display with at least super reach is executed regardless of the jackpot type.

  FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 54. The outlier variation pattern determination table changes according to the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is “out of range”. It is a table referred to in order to determine a pattern as one of a plurality of types. The outlier variation pattern determination table is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  When “non-reach X1” is determined as the variation pattern type, non-reach PA1-1 or non-reach PA1-2 is determined as the variation pattern, and when “non-reach X2” is determined as the variation pattern type, the variation pattern When non-reach PA1-3 is determined and “normal X1” is determined as the variation pattern type, normal PA2-1 is determined as the variation pattern, and when “super X1” is determined as the variation pattern type, Super PA3-1 or super PA3-2 is determined as a pattern.

  FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot variation pattern determination table is a random number for random pattern determination (random 3) according to the determination result of the jackpot type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is “big hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. The big hit variation pattern determination table is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  When “normal Y1” is determined as the variation pattern type, normal PB2-1 is determined as the variation pattern. When “normal Y2” is determined as the variation pattern type, normal PC2-1 is determined as the variation pattern. When “super Y1” is determined as the variation pattern type, super PB3-1 or super PB3-2 is determined as the variation pattern, and when “super Y2” is determined as the variation pattern type, super PC3- 1 or super PC 3-2 is determined.

  FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H), and the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A005 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, one of the jackpot start 1 designation command to jackpot start 5 designation command is used according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of “15R normal big hit”, the big hit start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and in the case of “5R normal big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)). ) Is used, the big hit start 3 designation command (A003 (H)) is used when it is “15R probability variation big hit”, and the big hit start 4 designation command (A004 (H)) when it is “5R probability variation big hit”. ) Is used, and in the case of “sudden probability change big hit”, the big hit start 5 designation command (A005 (H)) is used.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round.

  The commands A301 (H) to A305 (H) display a jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command for specifying the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command to a jackpot end 5 designation command: an ending) 5 designation command). The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R normal big hit” is ended. The jackpot end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by “5R normal jackpot”. The big hit end 3 designation command (A303 (H)) is used to end the big hit game by “15R probability variable big hit”. The big hit end 4 designation command (A304 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “5R probability variable big hit” is ended. The big hit end 5 designation command (A305 (H)) is used to end the big hit game by the “suddenly promising big hit”.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time reduction state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is in the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big win and the determination result of the type of the big win. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  The game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit will be made when an effective start winning is made to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, and whether the value of the big hit type or the random number for determining the variation pattern type is It is determined whether it falls within the range of the determination value. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a value for designating the type of jackpot is set, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designating command, the type of the big hit, and the variable category command. Based on the above, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes a predetermined determination value, the variation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted in accordance with whether or not the jackpot is large and the type of jackpot.

  For example, if it is determined that the result is “displacement” at the time of effective start winning at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 sets the pattern in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A designation command (symbol 1 designation command) is transmitted. For example, when it is determined that “15R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “5R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “5R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, it is determined which display result of the special symbol is displayed, and the range of the determination pattern random number for the variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning a prize. Accordingly, a value is set in the EXT data, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is out of place at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 169. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, the non-reach X1 or non-reach X2 variation pattern type is assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 169 regardless of the gaming state and regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach X1 or non-reach X2 (that is, not reach state) based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Can do.

  Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 219, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 220 to 239, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, the normal X1 variation pattern type is assigned to the range of the determination values 220 to 239 regardless of the gaming state and regardless of the total number of pending storages. The microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is normal X1 (that is, normal reach) based on the reception of the variation category 3 command.

  Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 240 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state and regardless of the total number of pending storage, the variation pattern type of super X1 is assigned to the range of determination values 240 to 251. The microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super X1 (that is, super reach) based on the reception of the variation category 4 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the big hit (normal big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit) is made at the time of effective start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 49. judge. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 49 (that is, when normal Y1 or normal Y2), the CPU 56 issues a variation category 11 command in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send. In this embodiment, since the variation pattern type of normal Y1 or normal Y2 is assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 49 regardless of the big hit type, the production control microcomputer 100 is subject to fluctuation. Based on the reception of the category 11 command, it can be recognized that at least the variation pattern type is normal Y1 or normal Y2 (that is, normal reach).

  Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 50 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 12 command in which “11 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, since the variation pattern type of super Y1 or super Y2 is assigned to the range of the determination values 50 to 251 regardless of the big hit type, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the variation. Based on the reception of the category 12 command, it can be recognized that at least the variation pattern type is super Y1 or super Y2 (that is, super reach).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 can execute a pre-reading effect, which will be described later, by receiving a variable category command based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 effectively. It becomes possible.

(Storage processing to the hold memory buffer at the time of effective start winning)
When an effective start winning in the first start winning opening 13 occurs, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and sets the value of the added reserved memory number counter for counting the added reserved memory number to 1. increase. Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. For example, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number (see FIG. 7), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination A random number for use (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area.

  When an effective start winning at the second start winning port 14 occurs, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 and sets the value of the added reserved memory number counter for counting the added reserved memory number to 1. increase. Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer. For example, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number (see FIG. 7), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination A random number for use (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area.

  In the first reserved memory buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved memory number is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. Random numbers are stored in accordance with the effective start winning order in both the storage areas of the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and n = 1, 2, 3, 4 exists, = 1 is stored in the storage area, and if no random number is stored in the storage areas n = 2, 3 and 4, the random number is stored in the storage area n = 2. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

(Transmission process of start winning command at the time of effective start winning)
If the game state is a low probability state when an effective start winning to the first start winning port 13 occurs, the CPU 56 displays the extracted jackpot determination random number (random R) and the left column of FIG. 8A. When the gaming state is a high probability state, the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted and the jackpot determination at the high probability shown in the right column of FIG. Compare the values to see if they match.

  When the CPU 56 does not match the jackpot determination value, it sets a symbol 1 designation command (designation for losing). If it matches the jackpot determination value, the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) is compared with the jackpot type determination value (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. Check. If the value matches the big hit type judgment value (0 to 15) for the 15R normal big hit, the symbol 2 designation command (15R normal big hit designation) is set, and the big hit type judgment value (16 to 19) for the 15R probability variable big hit If they match, the symbol 4 designation command (15R probability variation jackpot designation) is set, and if it matches the jackpot type judgment value (20 to 34) for 5R probability variation jackpot, the symbol 5 designation command (5R probability variation jackpot designation) Is set, and if it is coincident with the big hit type judgment value (35 to 39) of the sudden probability variation big hit, a symbol 6 designation command (abrupt probability variation big hit designation) is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets one of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15 based on the jackpot determination result and the extracted random number for variation pattern type determination. Further, the CPU 56 sets a first reserved storage number addition designation command. A set of three commands, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number addition designation command set in this way, is transmitted to the effect control CPU 101 in a single timer interruption. In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number addition designation command are transmitted in this order. Upon receiving these start winning commands, the effect control CPU 101 receives the received symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved memory number addition designation command in the start prize winning command storage area (see FIG. It is stored in the first available storage area of the first start winning command storage area (20A).

  If the game state is in a low probability state when an effective start winning to the second start winning port 14 occurs, the CPU 56 displays the extracted jackpot determination random number (random R) and the left column of FIG. 8A. When the gaming state is a high probability state, the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted and the jackpot determination at the high probability shown in the right column of FIG. Compare the values to see if they match.

  When the CPU 56 does not match the jackpot determination value, it sets a symbol 1 designation command (designation for losing). If it matches the jackpot determination value, the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) is compared with the jackpot type determination value (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. Check. If the 5R normal big hit big hit type judgment value (0-15) matches, the symbol 3 designation command (5R normal big hit designation) is set, and the 15R probability variable big hit big hit type judgment value (16-34) If they match, the symbol 4 designation command (15R probability variation jackpot designation) is set, and if it matches the jackpot type judgment value (35-38) for the 5R probability variation jackpot, the symbol 5 designation command (5R probability variation jackpot designation) Is set, and if it is coincident with the big hit type judgment value (39) of the sudden probability variation big hit, a symbol 6 designation command (sudden probability variation big hit designation) is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets one of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15 based on the jackpot determination result and the extracted random number for variation pattern type determination. Further, the CPU 56 sets a second reserved storage number addition designation command. A set of three commands, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the second reserved memory number addition designating command set in this way, is transmitted to the effect control CPU 101 in one timer interrupt. In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the second reserved memory number addition designation command are transmitted in this order. Upon receiving these start winning commands, the effect control CPU 101 receives the received symbol designation command, variable category command, and second reserved memory number addition designation command in the start prize winning command storage area (see FIG. It is stored in the first vacant storage area of the second start winning command storage area (20B).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the first start port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13 or that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14. If the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is performed. Execute (Steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, a process for setting a flag (for example, a probability variation flag) indicating a gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 18) (step S1215). . In the process of step S1215, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the storage area in the start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning). You may make it extract at the time of the change start of 1 special symbol. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) in a variation pattern setting process to be described later, A value may be directly extracted from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a determination random number (random 3).

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 18, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a time reduction flag indicating that the gaming state is a time reduction state is set (step S1216). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1221. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1217). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1221 as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 executes a prize presentation effect process for preliminarily judging a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation based on the detected winning prize is executed. (Step S1218). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1219), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1220). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1221).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1219 and S1220, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is won and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1218 is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1219 to S1221 is executed, a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs, and the designating process at the time of winning in step S1218 is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  However, if the winning effect processing in step S1218 is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S1216 or step S1217, the CPU 56 transmits only the first reserved storage number addition designation command in step S1221. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. Note that, when the winning effect processing in step S1218 is not executed, a winning determination result designation in which a value (for example, “FF (H)”) indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is set as EXT data is designated. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1216 is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, if the gaming state is not the short-time state (in the case of the low base state) ) Only at the time of winning a prize in step S1218. Also, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1217 is executed, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the winning effect processing of step S1218 is only performed when the game is not in the big hit gaming state. Is executed.

  In this embodiment, the big win game state (specific game state) means that the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds and 5 rounds) after being notified that the big hit is started. This is a state from when the control is performed until it is notified that the final winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the big winning opening opening pre-process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process are executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is in an on state (step S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1224), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 18) (step S1226). . In the process of step S1226, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes winning effect processing (step S1227). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1228), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1229). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1230).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1228 and S1229, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the start-up winning is performed at the second start winning opening 14 and the winning-time effect processing in step S1227 is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1228 to S1230 is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, and the designating process at the time of winning in step S1227 is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing of steps S1218 and S1227. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1226 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit, decide the big hit type, or decide the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, Separately, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, before the variation display based on the start winning starts, Check in advance whether the jackpot will be a big hit, the type of jackpot, and the variation pattern. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. The pre-reading effect for notifying that it will be a big hit or super reach during the variation display of the effect symbol is executed.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not coincide with the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability variation flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state is set. Is confirmed (step S221). The probability variation flag is set for a period during which the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state by the game control microcomputer 560. The time reduction flag is set for a period during which the gaming state is controlled to the high base state by the gaming control microcomputer 560. If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1226 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that a plurality of variable displays can be executed after confirming whether or not the high probability state is obtained in step S221 at the time of starting winning, until the actual starting of the changing display based on the starting winning is started. There is sex. For this reason, the game state has changed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S221 and whether or not the change display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the change If a probabilistic big hit or sudden probable big hit occurs before the start, there is a change from the normal state to the high probability / high base state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and a determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating that it is “out” as a symbol designation command. Is set (step S224). Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, whether or not the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set). Is determined. In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are set in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. May change (for example, if a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state changes to a high probability / high base state). Therefore, the gaming state determined at step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and a determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for detachment according to the game state determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIG. 15 is determined. In this embodiment, a common threshold value (for example, 169, 219, and 239) is set regardless of the gaming state, but a different threshold value (for example, 169 for the low base state) depending on the gaming state. 239 and 239) may be set in the high base state.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets threshold values 169, 219, and 239. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 169 in step S232 described later, and if the value is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 169 (that is, 1 to 169). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 15). If the threshold value is 219 or less (that is, 170 to 219), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 15). If the threshold value is 239 or less (that is, 220 to 239), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 15). If the threshold value is not less than 239 (that is, 240 to 251), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 15).

  In the example of threshold determination shown above, since the threshold values are sequentially determined as 169, 219, and 239 from the smallest threshold value, the threshold value determined in the subsequent order is equal to or lower than the threshold value in the previous order. Never be in range. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 169 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 219 or less, the threshold value is not within the range of 1 to 169 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 169, 219, and 239 in order from the smallest value is shown, but conversely, 239, 219, and 169 are sequentially determined from the largest value. May be. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1226. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing at step S1218 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (the first hitting table shown in FIG. 8B). Using the special symbol), it is determined whether the big hit type is “15R normal big hit”, “15R probability variable big hit”, “5R probability variable big hit”, or “sudden probability big hit”. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect process in step S1227 is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. Is used to determine whether the big hit type is “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability big hit”, “5R positive big hit”, or “sudden probability big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230) (see FIG. 14). In this case, when it is determined that the “15R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R normal big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “5R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “5R normal big hit” to the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “5R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “5R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S229 (step S231). In this embodiment, a common threshold value (for example, 49) is set regardless of the jackpot type. However, when the threshold value differs depending on the jackpot type, a different threshold value is set for each jackpot type. You may do it.

  For example, when the CPU 56 determines any of “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability variable big hit”, “5R probability variable big hit”, or “sudden probability variable big hit”, the threshold value 49 is set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 49 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 49 (that is, 1 to 49). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 15). If the threshold value is not 49 or less (that is, 50 to 251), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 15).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226 and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1215 and S1226 (FIG. 17) to determine the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined which range of the determination value is (step S232).

  In steps S226 and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type determination table is set. May be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “03 (H)”, “10 (H)” as shown in FIG. 15 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. ”To“ 11 (H) ”is set to the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined even if it is determined that the win is determined in the determination at the time of winning a prize, If it is determined that this is the case, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big hit is made, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command which comprehensively indicates that the variation pattern type of the big hit may be transmitted. For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a prefetch effect described later may be executed.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the start winning command storage area. Among these, FIG. 20A shows a specific example of the command storage area at the time of the first start winning prize. FIG. 20B shows a specific example of the second start winning command storage area. As shown in FIG. 20A, an area (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the first start winning command storage area. Yes. In this embodiment, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, a command for design designation command, variable category command, and first reserved memory number addition designation command is set in one timer interruption. Sent by Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20A, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start winning command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count addition designation command (first reserved memory) A storage area is secured so that a number addition designation command) can be stored in association with each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, an area (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second start winning command storage area. Has been. In this embodiment, when there is a start winning at the second start winning port 14, a command for design designation command, variable category command, and second reserved memory number addition designation command are set in one timer interruption. Sent by Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20B, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the second start winning command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count addition designation command (second reserved memory) A storage area is secured so that a number addition designation command) can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In the following description, the command at the time of start winning stored in the first start winning command storage area in association with the first reserved storage number addition specifying command (including the first reserved storage number addition specifying command) is stored. May be collectively referred to as a first pending command, and a command for starting winning (stored in the second pending memory number addition) stored in the second starting winning command storage area in association with the second reserved memory number addition designation command is stored. (Including a designated command) may be collectively referred to as a second pending command. Further, the first hold command and the second hold command may be collectively referred to as a hold command.

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 20 is the first storage area (storage area) at the timing when the effect symbol variation display is started every time the effect symbol variation display is started. It is deleted from what is stored in 1), and the contents of the command storage area at the start winning prize are shifted. For example, in the case of starting the variation display of the effect symbol in response to the variation display of the first special symbol, the one stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the first start winning prize command storage area And the contents of the first start winning prize command storage area are shifted. In addition, for example, if the display of variation of the effect symbol is started in response to the variation display of the second special symbol, it is stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the second start winning command storage area. And the contents of the second start winning prize command storage area are shifted.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the pre-reading effect is executed in the pre-reading effect determination process based on the command at the time of the start winning (symbol designation command or variable category command) stored in the start winning command storage area. It is determined whether or not to do so.

  In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit, the big hit type is decided, or the fluctuation pattern is decided. At the timing when the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is started, before the display of fluctuation based on the start winning is started, whether or not the big win is determined in advance, the type of the big win, the fluctuation pattern Check which judgment value range the value of the random number for type judgment falls into. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and, for example, super-reach can be performed while the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the variation of the effect symbol. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect that gives notice of becoming.

(Display of the fluctuation corresponding display area 180, the first reserved memory number display unit 18c and the second reserved memory number display unit 18d)
FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the fluctuation corresponding display area 180, the first reserved memory number display unit 18 c, and the second reserved memory number display unit 18 d provided at the lower part of the effect display device 9. The fluctuation corresponding display area 180, the first reserved memory number display part 18c and the second reserved memory number display part 18d are located below the effect symbol display area in which the effect symbol (in this example, “777”) is displayed. This is an area in which a variation correspondence display or a hold display, which is a circular object corresponding to each variation display that is being executed or has been determined to be executed, is displayed. Here, in the variation corresponding display area 180 located at the lower left end of the effect display device 9, a variation corresponding display corresponding to the currently performed variation display (variable display satisfying the start condition) is displayed. Moreover, it is executed on the first reserved memory number display unit 18c and the second reserved memory number display unit 18d that are located on the right side of the variation corresponding display area 180 when viewed from the player side below the effect display device 9. The hold display corresponding to the variable display that has been determined but not yet executed (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) is displayed.

  The first reserved memory number display unit 18c and the second reserved memory number display unit 18d are sequentially displayed from the right side of the fluctuation corresponding display region 180 toward the right end of the screen, the hold display regions 181A, 181B, 181C, 181D, 181E, 181F, 181G. , And 181H, of which the hold display areas 181A to 181D constitute the first hold memory number display part 18c, and the hold display areas 181E to 181H constitute the second hold memory number display part 18d.

  When the variable display start condition corresponding to the hold display displayed on the first hold memory number display unit 18c or the second hold memory number display unit 18d is satisfied, the first hold memory number display unit 18c or the second hold memory number display unit 18c The object displayed as the hold display on the memory number display portion 18d is shifted to the variation corresponding display area 180 and displayed as the variation corresponding display. At this time, the display mode of the object shifted to the variation corresponding display area 180 is maintained. That is, if the display mode of the hold display displayed on the first hold memory number display unit 18c or the second hold memory number display unit 18d is a special mode, the hold display is shifted to the fluctuation corresponding display area 180 and changed. Even if it is displayed as a correspondence display, the display mode of the variation correspondence display is a special mode.

  22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, if the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the background designation command is transmitted every time for each variation. Only when the state changes, the background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of transmissions of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is given. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S30). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S307 can be shared between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in steps S1215 and S1226 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S62. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit or sudden probability change big hit, set in the process of ending the big hit game, and when the big hit is determined, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is terminated and stopped. It is reset when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S66 as it is.

  In step S62, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S63). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R normal big hit”, “ “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability change big hit”, “5R probability change big hit”, “sudden probability change big hit”) are determined as the types of big hits (step S64). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in steps S1215 and S1226 of the start port passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer and the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. .

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S65). For example, when the jackpot type is “15R normal jackpot”, “01” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “5R normal jackpot”, “02” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “03” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “5R positive variable big hit”, “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “05” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S66). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of the big hit symbols is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when “15R probability variation big hit” is decided, “7” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “5R probability variation big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, When “15R normal big hit” is determined, “2” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “5R normal big hit” is determined, “4” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When it is determined that “probable big hit”, “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S67).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S81). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines which of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the big hit type. Is selected (step S82). Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S83). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state, and is reset when the time reduction state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be one of the big hits, is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and when it is determined to be a big hit, at the timing when the special symbols change display is ended and the stop symbols are stopped and displayed. Reset. In addition, when the big hit game based on the 15R normal big hit or the 5R normal big hit is finished, it is reset at the timing when the variable display of 100 times is finished. If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S83), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for losing when the variation time is shortened as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. A table is selected (step S86). Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

  If the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S83), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (step S84). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in step S84), the CPU 56 uses a normal deviation variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected (step S85). Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S84), the CPU 56 uses the table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types as a table used for declining the variation time. A variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S86). Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processing of steps S83 to S86, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for variation time reduction is selected. In addition, even when the gaming state is a short-time state (including a case where the game state is controlled to the short-time state together with the probability variation state), the deviation variation pattern type determination table for variation time reduction is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S87 described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S88. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a short-time state or when the total number of pending storage is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed.

  Even if the gaming state is a short-time state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), a variation display of the shortening variation is performed. It may not be possible. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S83, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. A pattern type determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and refers to the table selected in the process of step S82, S85, or S86. Thus, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S87). In the case where the random number 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for generating the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2). A value may be directly extracted from the random number counter for use, and the variation pattern type may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot variation pattern determination table and the loss variation pattern determination table as tables used for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S87. One of them is selected (step S88). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S88. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S89). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S90). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S91).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S92). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S93).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S83 to S86, S87 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (see FIG. 12) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 6 designation in accordance with the determined jackpot type and deviation. Do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S101). If not set, the process proceeds to step S111. When the big hit flag is set, when the big hit type is “15R normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S102 and S103). Specifically, whether or not it is “15R normal big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S65 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the type of jackpot is “5R normal jackpot”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S104 and S105). Specifically, whether or not it is “5R normal big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S65 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can.

  Further, when the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S106 and S107). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S65 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “5R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (steps S108 and S109). Whether or not it is “5R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S65 of the special symbol normal processing is “04”. it can.

  On the other hand, if it is not “5R probability variation big hit” (that is, “sudden probability variation big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S110).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in Step S101), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S111).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S112).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S132).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is 15R normal jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the jackpot type is 15R probability variable jackpot, a jackpot start 3 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is 5R probability variation jackpot, a jackpot start 4 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is suddenly a promiscuous jackpot, a jackpot start 5 designation command is transmitted. The type of jackpot is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying that the jackpot has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) in the timer before opening the big prize opening (step S134). Note that the pre-winner pre-opening timer is a timer for measuring the time until the big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. Specifically, at the start of the big hit game, in step S134, the time required from the start of the variable display to the start of the first round (the variable display is stopped on the effect control microcomputer 100 side and the jackpot symbol is displayed). The time before the first round is started until the start of the first round is set as the pre-opening timer. For the first and subsequent rounds, the interval time between the rounds (apparatus at the time of performing the interval effect between the rounds on the effect control microcomputer 100 side) is set as the timer before opening the big prize opening.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the number of releases corresponding to the jackpot type in the number-of-release counter (step S135). For example, the opening number counter is set to 15 times for 15R normal big hit or 15R probability variation big hit, 5 times for 5R normal big hit or 5R accurate variation big hit, and 2 times for sudden probability big hit.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S137).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the hourly number counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the hourly state is 0 (step S141). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by -1 (step S142). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S144). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a big hit end 1 designation command is sent if 15R is a normal big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent if it is a 5R normal big hit, and a big hit ends if it is a 15R probability variable big hit. When the 3R command is transmitted, if the 5R probability variation big hit is received, the big hit end 4 designation command is transmitted, and if it is suddenly the probability variation big hit, the big hit end 5 designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether the big hit that ends this time is a 15R normal big hit or a 5R normal big hit (step S166). Whether or not it is “15R normal big hit” or “5R normal big hit”, specifically, the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S65 of the special symbol normal processing is “01” or “02”. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If it is a 15R normal big hit or a 5R normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag and shifts to a time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  If neither the 15R normal big hit nor the 5R normal big hit is obtained (that is, if the 15R probability variable big hit, the 5R probability variable big hit or the sudden probability change big hit), the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (step S169). The time reduction flag is set to shift to the time reduction state (step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  29 and 30 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618A). Then, a display result designation command reception flag is set (step S618B). The display result designation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the display result designation command has been normally received.

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received.

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot start 1 designation command to the jackpot start 5 designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag to the jackpot start 5 designation command reception flag. Either one is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag to jackpot start 5 designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S673). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the time-short state flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-short state (step S674). Then, a background designation command reception flag indicating that any one of the background designation commands has been normally received is set (step S675).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S676), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green display). Color background screen) (step S677). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S678). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a probability change state flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state (step S679). Then, a background designation command reception flag is set (step S680).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S681), the effect control CPU 101 uses a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen (for example, a red display). Color background screen) (step S682). Further, the production control CPU 101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S683). Then, a background designation command reception flag is set (step S684).

  If the received production control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S685), the production control CPU 101 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been normally received. In step S686, control is performed to display the customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 after 30 seconds (step S687). Specifically, a timer for measuring 30 seconds is set, and when the timer times out, a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 9. If a variation pattern command or the like is received during measurement, the timer is reset and the measurement ends. After step S687, the number of reserved memories stored in each reserved memory number storage area is cleared (step S688).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command or executes a process (step S691). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  In the command analysis process, if the received presentation control command is any symbol designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 stores the received symbol designation command in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store in the first free storage area. However, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether the reserved memory number addition designation command received as a set within one timer interrupt is the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command. If it is the first reserved memory number addition designation command, the received symbol designation command is stored in the first start winning command storage area, and if it is the second reserved memory number addition designation command, the received symbol designation command is 2 Stored in the command storage area at the time of starting winning.

  If the received effect control command is any of the variation category commands, the effect control CPU 101 uses the received variation category command as the latest symbol in the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store in the storage area where the specified command is stored. However, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether the reserved memory number addition designation command received as a set within one timer interrupt is the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command. If it is the first reserved memory number addition designation command, the received variable category command is stored in the first start winning command storage area, and if it is the second reserved memory number addition designation command, the received variation category command is 2 Stored in the command storage area at the time of starting winning.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first reserved memory number addition designation command in the first start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored. The effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and adds 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number stored in the combined reserved memory number storage area.

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received second reserved memory number addition designation command in the second start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored. In addition, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area, and adds 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number stored in the combined reserved memory number storage area.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and stores the total reserved memory number. 1 is subtracted from the value of the total pending storage number stored in the area.

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area and stores the total reserved memory number. 1 is subtracted from the value of the total pending storage number stored in the area.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not to execute a hold change effect and a background change effect, which will be described later, as a prefetch effect, and an effect mode (hold) for executing the hold change effect and the background change effect. A pre-reading effect determination process for determining whether the display mode of display is the first special mode or the second special mode, or whether the background image of the effect design is the first special mode or the second special mode) Execute (Step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the non-execution flag is set (step S2301). The non-execution flag is a flag that indicates that the variable display of the effect symbol was not started at the start of the variable symbol variable display. If the non-execution flag is set, the process during variation non-execution is executed (step S2302), and the effect control process is terminated as it is. Thereby, when the non-execution flag is set, the configuration is such that steps S800 to S807 are not performed. The process of steps S800 to S803 is a process for variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. While the non-execution flag is set, the process for variable display of the effect symbol is not performed. . The non-execution flag is a flag that is set when the variation pattern command and the predetermined command are not normally received at the start of variable display of the special symbol in the probability variation state (see FIG. 43). Therefore, while the non-execution flag is set, the effect display device 9 continuously displays the image displayed when the non-execution flag is set. The images displayed when the non-execution flag is set are, for example, images such as a stop symbol image in the previous variable display, an effect image after the end of the big hit, and a customer waiting demonstration effect image.

  If the non-execution flag is not set in step S2301, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to either the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception wait process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): When the big hit is made, after the end of the variation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. For example, when a fanfare designation command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. For example, when an ending designation command for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  In the present embodiment, when the non-execution flag is set, step S2302 is performed and the effect control process is terminated (that is, steps S801 to S803 are not executed). Although the configuration for executing the variable display of the effect symbol on condition that the variation pattern command and the predetermined command are normally received is realized, the specific control is not limited to this. For example, it may be realized without providing step S2302, and when the variation pattern command is received in the probability variation state but the predetermined command is not normally received, the variation time timer is set / reset in steps S801 to S803. Although the process of subtracting the variable time timer is executed, it may be realized by not executing the process related to the display of the effect symbol. Further, when the variation pattern command is received in the probability variation state but the predetermined command is not normally received without providing step S2302, the variable symbol display time (recognizable by the received variation pattern command) is measured. However, during the measurement, it may be such that the variable display of the effect symbols in steps S801 to S803 is not executed.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating specific examples of the special mode display of the hold change effect and the special mode display of the background change effect.

  The “holding change effect” is a display mode of the hold display displayed on the first hold memory number display unit 18c and the second hold memory number display unit 18d in a special mode different from the normal mode under a predetermined condition. Production. In this embodiment, the special mode includes the first special mode (also referred to as “heat” character ”) shown in FIG. 32 (a-1) and the second special mode shown in FIG. 32 (a-2) (“ There are two types of flame effects. As shown in FIG. 32 (a-1), the “heat” character in the first special mode is a display mode in which the character “heat” is applied to the hold display. Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-2), the flame effect of the second special mode is a display mode in which a flame image effect is applied to the hold display.

  The “background change effect” is an effect of displaying the display mode of the background image of the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 in a special mode different from the normal mode under a predetermined condition. In this embodiment, the special mode is the first special mode (also referred to as “sunny sky mode”) shown in FIG. 32 (b-1) and the second special mode (“lightning strike” shown in FIG. 32 (b-2). There are two types of modes. As shown in FIG. 32 (b-1), the fine weather mode of the first special mode is a mode for displaying a background image indicating the fine weather in the sun. As shown in FIG. 32 (b-2), the lightning strike mode of the second special mode is a mode for displaying a background image indicating the weather in which a lightning strike has occurred from a thundercloud.

  The process in which these hold change effects and background change effects are executed will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing prefetch effect determination processing (step S800A). In the pre-reading effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first has a set of start winning commands (that is, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or It is confirmed whether or not a second set of second reserved memory number addition designation command) has been received (step S1001). Specifically, a set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) are stored in the command storage area at the time of winning a prize. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If a command for starting winning a set is not newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

  If a command for starting a winning prize is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 extracts effect random numbers (step S1002). The random number for the effect extracted here is whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the background change effect in the winning determination process, the hold change effect determination process, and the background change effect determination process, which will be described later. Used to determine the mode of the hold change effect and the background change effect. Next, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the effect flag table (FIG. 36 to be described later), and checks whether both the hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag are set (step S1003). The hold change effect flag is set based on the decision to execute the hold change effect in the winning determination process or the hold change effect determination process described later. Further, the background change effect flag is set based on the decision to execute the background change effect in the winning determination process or the background change effect determination process described later. That is, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not both the hold change effect and the background change effect are determined to be executed. In this embodiment, the case where YES is determined in step S1003 is the case where both the hold change effect and the background change effect have already been executed, or the hold change effect has already been executed and the background change effect has not yet been executed. One of the cases where it has not been executed but has been decided to be executed. When both the on-hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag are set in the effect flag table (Y in step S1003), the effect control CPU 101 newly generates a command corresponding to the newly received start winning prize command. A process for displaying a reserved display in a normal mode that is not a special mode (for example, a round display mode in which neither characters nor image effects are applied) is executed (step S1010).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the effect flag table (FIG. 36 to be described later), and checks whether neither the hold change effect flag nor the background change effect flag is set (step S1004). When neither the hold change effect flag nor the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table, that is, when neither the hold change effect flag nor the background change effect flag is set (Y in step S1004), The effect control CPU 101 executes a winning determination process (step S1005), which will be described later. If either the pending change effect flag or the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (N in step S1004), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether only the background change effect flag is set. (Step S1006). When only the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S1006), the effect control CPU 101 executes a hold change effect determination process (step S1007) described later. When the background change effect flag is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S1006), it is determined that only the pending change effect flag is set. At this time, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the number of reserved memories (step S1008). In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, if the gaming state is the low base state (normal state in this example), the first reserved memory number The number is confirmed, and if the gaming state is a high base state (in this example, the probability variation state or the short time state), the number of the second pending storage number is confirmed. If the number of reserved memories is less than 3 (N in step S1008), the production control CPU 101 displays a new reserved display corresponding to the newly received command at the time of starting winning a normal mode that is not a special mode. In step S1010, the process of displaying is performed. When the number of reserved memories is 3 or more (Y in step S1008), the effect control CPU 101 executes a background change effect determining process (step S1009) described later.

  When the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S1006 to check whether only the background change effect flag is set, at least one of the hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag is displayed in the effect flag table. Is not set, and it has already been confirmed that either the pending change effect flag or the background change effect flag is set (step S1003 and step S1004). If it can be confirmed that it is set, it can be determined that only the background change effect flag is set at that time.

(Winning determination process (step S1005), FIG. 34)
As described above, when the effect control CPU 101 confirms that neither the hold change effect flag nor the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S1004), the winning determination process (step S1005) is performed. Run. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific process of the winning determination process (step S1005).

  First, the effect control CPU 101 executes (1) whether to execute a prefetch effect (holding change effect and background change effect) based on the winning determination table, and (2) if it executes the prefetch effect. The type and effect mode of the prefetch effect to be performed are determined (step S1020). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command (see FIG. 14), the number of reserved memories, and the extracted effect random number (step S1002) among the received commands at the time of start winning. And the winning determination table (FIG. 35). That is, the effect control CPU 101 determines a winning determination table to be used based on the number of reserved memories, determines a winning determination result based on the contents of the symbol designation command, and determines in advance for each winning determination result. Based on the ratio, (1) whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and (2) an effect mode when executing the prefetch effect is determined. These processes will be described more specifically.

  First, when the number of reserved memories is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines to use the winning determination table shown in FIG. In this case, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state in this example), it is confirmed whether or not the first reserved memory number is 3 or more, and the gaming state is a high base state (in this example, If the probability change state or the short time state), it is confirmed whether or not the second reserved memory number is 3 or more.

  Here, when the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of”, so the effect control CPU 101 determines the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode. 5%, the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 1%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 2%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 2%, and the look-ahead effect The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of not executing is 90%.

  When the symbol designation command is C401 (H), it is determined that the determination result at the time of winning is “15R normal big hit”. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 5%, and the look-ahead effect is The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 45%.

  When the symbol designating command is C402 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “5R normal big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 5%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 5%, and the look-ahead effect is A determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 60%.

  When the symbol designation command is C403 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “15R probability variation big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 20%, and the look-ahead effect is The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 30%.

  When the symbol designating command is C404 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “5R probability variation big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 5%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 20%, and the look-ahead effect is The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 45%.

  When the symbol designating command is C405 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “suddenly probable big hit”, and therefore the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 5%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 20%, and the look-ahead effect is The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 45%.

  When the number of reserved memories is less than 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines to use the winning determination table shown in FIG. Unlike the winning determination table when the number of reserved memories is 3 or more, this winning determination table is set not to execute the background change effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the background change effect is not executed when the number of reserved memories is less than 3.

  Here, when the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of”, so the effect control CPU 101 determines the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode. The determination process for the prefetch effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 1% and the ratio in which the prefetch effect is not executed is 90%.

  When the symbol designating command is C401 (H) to C405 (H), the winning determination result is “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability big hit”, “5R probability big hit”, or “suddenly” Since it is determined that “probable big hit”, the CPU 101 for effect control has an execution rate of the hold change effect of the first special mode 10%, an execution rate of the hold change effect of the second special mode 20%, and the pre-read effect A determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 70%.

  As described above, in order to execute the pre-reading effect at a predetermined rate, the actual processing is as follows, for example. That is, if the production random number is defined as a random number in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and the number of reserved memories is 3 or more and the determination result at the time of winning is “out of”, the production random number is 0 to 4 If the range is within the range, the change in the first special mode is changed. If the production random number is 5, the change is in the second special mode. If the production random number is 6 or 7, the background change is in the first special mode. The effect control CPU 101 performs processing so that the background change effect of the second special mode is performed when the effect or effect random number is 8 or 9, and the prefetch effect is not executed when the effect random number is 10 to 99. In addition, the numerical value range defined as the random number for production is arbitrary, and it may be set so that each prefetch production is executed at a predetermined ratio as a result.

  In the present embodiment, the hold change effect is set to suggest the possibility of a big hit, and the background change effect is set to indicate the type of the big win. That is, it is set so that the possibility of a big hit is higher and the possibility of losing is lower in the case where the second special aspect is executed than the first special aspect among the pending change effects. In addition, when the background change effect of the first special mode is executed, the possibility of 15R big hit (15R normal big hit and 15R positive big hit) is set higher than 5R big hit (5R normal big hit and 5R probability big hit). Yes. In addition, when the background change effect of the second special mode is executed, there is a higher possibility of a probable big hit (15R probable big hit, 5R probable big hit, and sudden probable big hit) than a normal big hit (15R normal big hit and 5R normal big hit). It is set to be.

  In this way, by setting the winning decision table so that the hold change effect and the background change effect suggest the possibility of jackpot and the type of jackpot, respectively, so that the player pays attention to the hold change effect and the background change effect It is possible to improve interest.

  FIG. 36 is a table showing an example of the effect flag table. The effect flag table indicates whether or not each of the first hold display and each second hold display is a target of a prefetch effect, and a type of prefetch effect (hold) This is a storage area for storing a change effect or a background change effect) and a mode (first special mode or second special mode, or first special mode or second special mode). In addition, in this embodiment, the above information is also stored in the hold storage (that is, the change correspondence display) in which the start condition is satisfied.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the effect flag table stores a change correspondence display, a hold change effect flag, and a background change effect flag corresponding to each of the first hold display and each second hold display.

  The hold change effect flag includes a first special mode flag and a second special mode flag, and the background change effect flag includes a first special mode flag and a second special mode flag. In the above-described winning determination process, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the number of reserved memories including the reserved memory based on the starting prize when it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect based on the determination at the starting prize. To do. For example, when the first reserved memory number is 3, a new start prize is generated and the first reserved memory number becomes 4, and the pre-reading effect determination process is executed for the start prize, and the second special When it is determined to execute the background change effect of the aspect, the effect control CPU 101 sets the second special aspect flag of the background change effect flag corresponding to the first hold display 4 in the effect flag table (see FIG. 36). ).

  The above is the process of step S1020 of the winning determination process. The effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it has been decided to execute the hold change effect as a result of the process of step S1020 (step S1021). As a result, when it is decided to execute the hold change effect (Y in step S1021), as described above, the current reserved memory number (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition) in the effect flag table. The production control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the production mode in correspondence with the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number after the addition update based on the reception of the designation command (step S1022). Then, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in either the determined first special mode or the second special mode (step S1023), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 101 has not decided to execute the hold change effect (N in step S1021), then the effect control CPU 101 continuously executes the background change effect up to which variable display. Decide what to do. In the present embodiment, when the big display is a big hit in the variation display with the background change effect in the first special mode (sunny mode), it is determined that the big hit of 15R, that is, the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability big hit, and the second special In the case of a big hit in the variation display accompanied with the background change effect of the mode (lightning strike mode), the following steps S1026 to S1032 are performed in order to confirm that the probability change big hit, that is, the 15R positive change big hit, the 5R positive change big hit or the sudden positive change big hit. Execute the process.

  If the CPU 101 for effect control has not decided to execute the hold change effect (N in step S1021), it confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the background change effect as a result of the process of step S1020. This is performed (step S1025). If it is not decided to execute the background change effect (N in Step S1025), a new hold display is displayed in a normal manner (Step S1033), and the winning determination process is terminated. If it is decided to execute the background change effect (Y in step S1025), the effect control CPU 101 next confirms the mode of the background change effect.

  When the background change effect is the first special mode (clear sky mode) (Y in step S1026), the effect control CPU 101 confirms the symbol designation command and determines whether or not the change display to be determined is a big hit other than 15R. That is, it is determined that the 5R normal big hit, the 5R probability big hit, or the sudden probability big hit is not the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability big hit (step S1027). As a result of this determination, when the change display of the determination target is a big hit other than 15R (Y in step S1027), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the current reserved memory count −1 (one immediately before the determination target) in the effect flag table. The background change effect flag of the first special mode corresponding to (holding display) is set (step S1028). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in a normal manner (step S1033), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, when the change display of the determination target is a big hit of 15R (N in step S1027), the effect control CPU 101 corresponds to the current number of reserved memories (the determination target hold display) in the effect flag table. A background change effect flag of one special mode is set (step S1029). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in a normal manner (step S1033), and ends the winning determination process.

  If the background change effect is not the first special mode (sunny mode) (N in step S1026), it is determined that the background change effect is the second special mode (lightning strike mode). At this time, the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the change display to be determined is a normal big hit, that is, a 15R normal big hit or a 5R normal big hit, and is not a 15R positive variation big hit, a 5R positive variation big hit, or a sudden positive random change big hit. Determination is made (step S1030). As a result of this determination, if the change display of the determination target is a 15R normal big hit or a 5R normal big hit (Y in step S1030), the production control CPU 101 determines that the current reserved memory count −1 (the decision target) in the production flag table. The background change effect flag of the second special mode corresponding to the previous hold display) is set (step S1031). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in a normal manner (step S1033), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, when the variation display to be determined is not usually a big hit, that is, when it is off, 15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit (N in step S1030), the production control CPU 101 displays the production flag. In the table, the background change effect flag of the second special mode corresponding to the current number of reserved memories (the pending display of the determination target) is set (step S1032). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in a normal manner (step S1033), and ends the winning determination process.

  The above is the specific process of the winning determination process (step S1005, FIG. 34) of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 33).

  By performing the processing as described above, if there is a pending storage corresponding to a variable display other than the 15R big hit (15R normal big hit or 15R probability variable big hit), the background change effect of the first special mode until the previous variable display. The continuous production ends. As a result, the player understands that the 15R jackpot is confirmed when the big hit is made while the background change effect of the first special mode is being executed, and the player pays attention to the background change effect. , Can improve interest. Similarly, regarding the relationship between the probability change big hit (15R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit, or sudden probability change big hit) and the background change effect of the second special mode, the player can perform while the background change effect of the second special mode is being executed. In the case of a big hit, it will be understood that a probable big hit will be established, and the player will pay attention to the background change effect, which can improve the interest.

  In this embodiment, since the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, when the gaming state is in the low base state (normal state in this example), the first reserved memory is used as the subject of advance notice. It is also conceivable that the change display of the second special symbol interrupts in the middle when the change effect is being executed. In this case, for example, the execution period of the background change effect may be extended according to the variable display of the interrupted second special symbol. Further, for example, when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted, the background change effect may be canceled halfway.

(Hold change effect determination process (step S1007), FIG. 37)
As described above, when it is confirmed that only the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S1006), the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change effect determining process (step S1007). FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the hold change effect determination process (step S1007). FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a specific example of the hold change effect determination table.

  First, based on the hold change effect determination table, the effect control CPU 101 (1) whether or not to execute the hold change effect, and (2) the hold change effect to be executed when executing the hold change effect. An aspect is determined (step S1040). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designating command (see FIG. 14) of the received commands at the start winning prize, the extracted effect random number (step S1002), and the hold change effect. It is determined by comparing with the determination table (FIG. 38). That is, the effect control CPU 101 determines the winning determination result based on the contents of the symbol designation command, and (1) whether to execute the hold change effect based on a predetermined ratio for each winning determination result. No, and (2) the effect mode when executing the hold change effect. These processes will be described more specifically.

  When the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of place”, so the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10%, The determination process for the hold change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the hold change effect of 2 special modes is 2% and the ratio of not executing the prefetch effect is 88%.

  When the symbol designating command is C401 (H) to C405 (H), the winning determination result is “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R positive change big hit”, “5R positive change big hit”, or “sudden probability change”. Because it is determined to be “big hit”, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the pre-reading effect with the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode 20%, the execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode 40%. The determination process for the pending change effect (one of the pre-read effects) is executed so that the ratio of not performing is 40%.

  As described above, in the hold change effect determination table in FIG. 38, the hold change effect is executed at a higher rate than the winning determination table in FIG. That is, when neither the on-hold change effect nor the background change effect is executed (when the winning determination process in step S1005 is executed), the determination is YES in step S1006. In the case where the hold change effect determination process in step S1007 is executed), the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode is increased.

  Here, the actual processing of the effect control CPU 101 is performed using the effect random numbers, but the processing is the same as the processing at the time of winning determination processing. That is, the numerical range of the random number for production and the corresponding hold change effect of the first special mode and the hold change effect of the second special mode are executed so that the hold change effect is executed at the predetermined ratio. A numerical value range and a numerical value range that does not execute the hold change effect may be set.

  The above is the process of step S1040 of the hold change effect determination process. In addition, although each process of step S1041-S1047 of a pending | holding change effect determination process is demonstrated concretely below, this process is the same as the process of step S1021-S1023 and step S1033 of a winning time determination process (FIG. 34), respectively. is there.

  The effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it has been decided to execute the hold change effect as a result of the process of step S1040 described above (step S1041). As a result, when it is not decided to execute the hold effect (N in step S1041), the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1047) and ends the hold change effect determination process. To do. When it is decided to execute the hold change effect (Y in step S1041), the effect control CPU 101 corresponds to the present hold memory number (the determination target hold display) in the effect flag table according to the effect mode. The flag is set (step S1042). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the new hold display to be determined as the hold change effect of either the first special mode or the second special mode determined (step S1023), and the hold change effect determination process Exit.

  The above is the specific process of the pending change effect determination process (step S1007, FIG. 37) of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 33).

(Background change effect determination processing (step S1009), FIG. 39)
As described above, when the number of reserved memories is 3 or more (Y in step S1008), the effect control CPU 101 executes a background change effect determining process (step S1009). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a specific process of the background change effect determination process (step S1009).

  First, the effect control CPU 101, based on the background change effect determination table, (1) whether or not to execute the background change effect, and (2) the effect of the background change effect to be executed when executing the background change effect. Determine aspects. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designating command (see FIG. 14) from the received set of winning prize commands, the extracted effect random number (step S1002), and the background change effect. It is determined by comparing with the determination table (FIG. 40). That is, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the determination result at the time of winning based on the contents of the symbol designation command, and (1) whether to execute the background change effect based on a predetermined ratio for each winning determination result. No, and (2) the effect mode when executing the background change effect is determined. These processes will be described more specifically.

  When the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of place”, so the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 4%, 2. The determination process for the background change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the special mode is 4% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 92%.

  When the symbol designating command is C401 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “15R normal big hit”, and therefore the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 40%. The determination process for the background change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the second special mode is 10% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 50%.

  When the symbol designating command is C402 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “5R normal big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 10%. The background change effect determination process is executed so that the execution rate of the background change effect of the second special mode is 10% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 80%.

  When the symbol designation command is C403 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “15R probability variation big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 40%. The background change effect determination process is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the second special mode is 40% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 20%.

  When the symbol designating command is C404 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “5R probability variation big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 10%. The background change effect determination process is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the second special mode is 40% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 50%.

  When the symbol designating command is C405 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “suddenly promising big hit”, so the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 10%. The background change effect determination process is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the second special mode is 40% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 50%.

  As described above, in the background change effect determination table of FIG. 40, the background change effect is executed at a higher rate than the winning determination table of FIG. That is, when neither the hold change effect nor the background change effect is executed (when the winning determination process of step S1005 is executed), when the hold change effect is executed (NO is determined in step S1006). In the case where the background change effect determination process in step S1009 is executed), the rate at which the background image changes to the first special mode or the second special mode is increased.

  Here, the actual process of the effect control CPU 101 is performed using the effect random number, but the process is the same as the process during the winning determination process and the pending change effect determination process. That is, the numerical range of the effect random number and the corresponding background change effect of the first special mode and the background change effect of the second special mode are executed so that the background change effect is executed at the predetermined ratio. A numerical value range and a numerical value range that does not execute the hold change effect may be set.

  The above is the process of step S1050 in the background change effect determination process. In addition, although each process of step S1051-S1060 of a background change effect determination process is demonstrated concretely below, this process is the same as that of step S1025-S1033 of a winning time determination process (FIG. 34). In the present embodiment, when a big hit is made during the variable display accompanied by the background change effect in the first special mode (sunny mode), it is determined that the big hit of 15R, that is, the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability big hit, In the second special mode (lightning strike mode), when a big hit is made during the fluctuation display with the background change effect, the probability variation big hit, that is, the 15R probability variation big hit, the 5R probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is determined. Steps S1051 to S1059 are executed.

  The effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the background change effect as a result of the process of step S1050 described above (step S1051). As a result, when it is not determined to execute the background change effect (N in step S1051), the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and background change effect determination processing Exit. When it is determined to execute the background change effect (Y in step S1051), the effect control CPU 101 next confirms the mode of the background change effect (step S1052).

  When the background change effect is the first special mode (clear sky mode) (Y in step S1052), the effect control CPU 101 confirms the symbol designation command, and whether or not the change display to be determined is a big hit other than 15R. That is, it is determined that it is a 5R normal big hit, a 5R probability big hit, or a sudden probability big hit, but not a 15R normal big hit or a 15R certain big hit (step S1054). As a result of this determination, when the variation display of the determination target is a big hit other than 15R (Y in step S1054), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the current reserved memory number −1 (one immediately before the determination target) in the effect flag table The background change effect flag of the first special mode corresponding to (holding display) is set (step S1055). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, when the change display of the determination target is a big hit of 15R (N in step S1054), the effect control CPU 101 corresponds to the current number of reserved memories (the determination target hold display) in the effect flag table. A background change effect flag of one special mode is set (step S1056). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and ends the winning determination process.

  If the background change effect is not the first special mode (sunny mode) (N in step S1052), it is determined that the background change effect is the second special mode (lightning strike mode). At this time, the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the change display to be determined is a normal big hit, that is, a 15R normal big hit or a 5R normal big hit, and is not a 15R positive variation big hit, a 5R positive variation big hit, or a sudden positive random change big hit. Determination is made (step S1057). As a result of this determination, when the change display of the determination target is 15R normal big hit or 5R normal big hit (Y in step S1057), the production control CPU 101 displays the current reserved memory number −1 (the decision target) in the production flag table. The background change effect flag of the second special mode corresponding to the previous hold display) is set (step S1058). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, when the change display to be determined is not normally big hit, that is, when it is off, 15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit (N in step S1057), the production control CPU 101 displays the production flag. In the table, the background change effect flag of the second special mode corresponding to the current number of reserved memories (the pending display of the determination target) is set (step S1059). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and ends the winning determination process.

  The above is the specific process of the background change effect determination process (step S1009, FIG. 39) of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 33).

  In this embodiment, an example in which the effect control CPU 101 confirms the symbol designation command in order to confirm the winning determination result has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this method. For example, the effect control CPU 101 can confirm whether the game is out of play or big hit also by confirming the variation category command instead of the symbol designating command.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the non-execution process. The variation non-execution process is the process shown in step S2302 of FIG. 31 and is performed when the variable display of the effect symbol is not started when the variable symbol variable display is started. In the variation non-execution process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a confirmed command reception flag is set (step S2401), and if it is set, resets the confirmed command reception flag (step S2402), A stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined according to the variation pattern command (step S2403). Specifically, the variable pattern command stored in the variable pattern command storage area is detected as to which variable display result (displacement, big hit) corresponds to the variation pattern command, and the variable display result is not suitable. If the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the production symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S2404). Thereby, when the symbol confirmation designation command is normally received at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the image (for example, the previous variation) that has been continuously displayed on the effect display device 9 from the start of the variable symbol variable display start. The stop symbol image) can be switched to the stop symbol of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  In step S2403, when the off symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a pre-set combination of off symbols may be determined, or a randomly determined off symbol may be determined. In the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize whether or not the variable display result is a big hit by the variation pattern command. However, since the big hit type cannot be recognized, in step S2403, the big hit symbol is changed to the effect symbol. When determining as a stop symbol, it is desirable to determine a jackpot symbol that suggests a jackpot that is less advantageous to the player as a stop symbol of the effect symbol. By doing so, a jackpot symbol that indicates a big jackpot that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, 15R normal jackpot, 15R probability variable jackpot) is displayed, and a jackpot that is less advantageous to the player is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by performing (for example, 5R normal big hit, 5R probability big hit).

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined according to the variation pattern command. However, the display result designation command is normal when the special symbol variable display starts. When the display symbol is received (for example, when the display result designation command reception flag is set), the stop symbol of the effect symbol may be determined according to the display result designation command. In addition, only when the information included in the received variation pattern command and the display result designation command match (when the variable display results (big hit / loss) in both commands match) It is good also as determining a stop symbol. At this time, if the received variation pattern command and the display result designation command do not match, it is desirable to determine the off symbol as a stop symbol of the effect symbol. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by being out of play while the effect symbol of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  If the confirmation command reception flag is not set in step S2401, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is set (step S2405). Then, the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is reset (step S2406), a predetermined off symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the effect symbol (step S2407), and the process proceeds to step S2404. Thereby, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is normally received, from the image (for example, the stopped symbol image in the previous variation) continuously displayed on the effect display device 9 from the start of the variable symbol special symbol display start. , It is configured to be able to switch to the display symbol and display. In step S2407, when a predetermined off symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a predetermined combination off symbol may be determined, or a randomly determined off symbol may be determined. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in step S2407, the predetermined off-set symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, but the stop symbol of the effect symbol may be determined according to the variation pattern command. If received, the stop symbol of the effect symbol may be determined according to the display result designation command.

  Two patterns are assumed as patterns for receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. First, as the first pattern, the variable display result of the special symbol that did not start the variable display of the effect symbol is out of order, the symbol confirmation designation command is not received normally, and the variable display ends and the summation is suspended There is a pattern in which a customer-waiting demo designation command is received when the stored number becomes 0 (changes are interrupted). Also, as the second pattern, the variable display result of the special symbol that did not start the variable display of the effect symbol is a big hit, the symbol confirmation designation command is not normally received, and the command related to the big hit (the big hit start designation command , The winning prize opening opening designation command, the winning prize opening opening designation command, and the big hit end designation command) are not received normally, and after the big hit game is finished, the total pending storage number becomes zero (the fluctuation is changed). This is a pattern in which a customer-waiting demo designation command is received when it is interrupted. If it is the first pattern, the variable symbol display result of the special symbol and the variable symbol display result of the effect symbol are determined by determining the off symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S2407 as in the present embodiment. As a result, the game progress can be matched with the progress of the game. Also, if it is the second pattern, the jackpot symbol is determined as a stop symbol in accordance with the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol after the jackpot game ends. As a result, there is a risk of giving the player a sense of expectation. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, even if the pattern is the second pattern, it is possible to stop and display the big hit symbol after the big hit game is ended by determining the off symbol as a stop symbol in step S2407. It is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of expectation.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol confirmation designation command or the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received in the variation non-execution process, the effect symbol variation stop process is performed after the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined (steps S2403 and S2407). In step S2404, the stop symbol of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable symbol special display is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in steps S2403 and S2407, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. May be determined and displayed on the image display device 9, and the process may shift to a variation pattern command reception waiting process in step S2404.

  If the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is not set in step S2405, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the fanfare flag is set (step S2408). If it is set, the fanfare flag is reset (step S2409), and process data corresponding to the fanfare effect is selected (step S2410). Then, the process timer is started (step S2411). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S2412). Here, when the fanfare flag is set, the variable display result of the special symbol that did not start the variable display of the production symbol is a big hit, the symbol confirmation designation command is not received normally, and the big hit starts This is when a specified command is received. Thereby, when the jackpot start designation command is normally received, from the image (for example, the stop symbol image in the previous variation) that has been continuously displayed on the effect display device 9 from the start of variable display of the special symbol, The fanfare effect image can be switched and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol is not started at the start of variable display of the special symbol, and the image displayed at the start of variable display of the special symbol is continuously displayed on the effect display device 9. When a jackpot start designation command is received in the state (hereinafter referred to as “variation not being executed”), the image displayed during the change non-execution is switched to the fanfare effect image and displayed. It is good also as switching and displaying to the stop symbol of an effect design from the image displayed during non-execution, and switching to a fanfare effect image after that. In that case, it is sufficient if the jackpot symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the effect symbol. For example, the stop symbol of the effect symbol may be determined according to the variation pattern command or the display result designation command, or a predetermined jackpot symbol may be determined. The symbol may be determined as the stop symbol of the effect symbol. When determining the stop symbol of the production symbol as the predetermined jackpot symbol, despite the fact that the jackpot symbol suggesting a big hit (for example, 15R normal big hit, 15R probability big hit) with high advantage to the player is stopped and displayed. In order to prevent the player from being discouraged by the occurrence of a big hit with a low advantage to the player (for example, a 5R normal big hit, a 5R probability variation big hit), the occurrence of a big hit with a low advantage to the player is suggested. It is desirable that the big hit image to be determined is determined as the stop symbol of the effect symbol.

  If the fanfare flag is not set in step S2408, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S2413). If it is not set, the process during non-execution of fluctuation is terminated as it is. If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S2414). Here, when the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variable symbol of the special symbol that has not started variable display of the effect symbol is terminated and the variable symbol of the next special symbol is started. This is a case where a variation pattern command is received. Thereby, when a new variation pattern command is normally received, from an image (for example, a stop symbol image in the previous variation) that has been continuously displayed on the effect display device 9 from the start of variable display of the special symbol. In this configuration, it is possible to switch to a variable display image with a new effect design.

  Note that if the variation pattern command reception flag is set in step S2413, the process proceeds to step S2414. In this case, the next timer interrupt that has received the variation pattern command from the gaming control microcomputer 100 causes S2414 to occur. Then, a variation pattern command reception waiting process (FIG. 42) is performed at the next timer interrupt, and an effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 43) is performed at the next timer interrupt. However, when the variation pattern command and the predetermined command are normally received at the start of variation of the special symbol (that is, when there is no problem in transmission / reception of each command), the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. The variation pattern command reception waiting process (FIG. 42) is performed by the timer interruption of No. 1, and the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 43) is performed by the next timer interruption. Therefore, when the variation of the production symbol is not started and the variation pattern command corresponding to the next variable display is received (Y in step S2413), compared to the case where there is no problem in transmission / reception of each command. A deviation of one timer interrupt will occur. Therefore, when the variation pattern command reception flag is set in step S2413, it is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring by performing steps S812 and S813 described later. When the variation pattern command reception flag is set in step S2413, the process may be shifted to the effect symbol variation start process instead of the variation pattern command reception waiting process in step S2414.

  In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received during non-execution of change, the image displayed during non-execution of change is switched to a variable display image of a new effect image. However, it is also possible to switch from the image displayed during non-execution of the change to the stop symbol of the effect symbol, and then switch to the variable display image of the new effect image and display it. In that case, the stop symbol of the effect symbol may be determined according to the variation pattern command or the display result designation command, or the stop symbol of the effect symbol may be determined as the predetermined symbol.

  After steps S2404, S2412, and S2414, the effect control CPU 101 resets the non-execution flag (step S2415), and ends the non-execution process.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (step S2601). If the certain change state flag or the short time state flag is set, that is, if the certain change state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the display result designation command reception flag is set (step S2602). ), If not set, the process proceeds to step S2607.

  If the display result designation command reception flag is set in step S2602, the display result designation command reception flag is reset (step S2603), and it is determined whether the background designation command reception flag is set (step S2604). . If not set, the process proceeds to step S2607. When the background designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the background designation command reception flag (step S2605), and includes information included in the received variation pattern command and information included in the display result designation command. Are determined to be consistent (step S2606). For example, it is determined whether or not the variable display result included in the variation pattern command matches the variable display result included in the display result designation command. Specifically, if the variable display results included in both commands match, they are matched, and if they do not match, they are not matched. If they match, the process proceeds to step S8001. If they do not match, the non-execution flag is set (step S2607), and the effect symbol start process is terminated as it is. The case where the information included in the variation pattern command and the information included in the display result designation command are not consistent is a case where at least one of the commands is not normally transmitted / received.

  In step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If a variation pattern that designates a pseudo-ream is also used and the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101, in step S8002, obtains a chance eye symbol (as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream) ( For example, a combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted) is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. . When the variation display result designation command is not normally received in step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine a stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the variation pattern command, or may display a predetermined off-set symbol. It is good also as determining as a stop symbol of an effect design. Here, the predetermined missing symbol is used in order to prevent the big hit symbol from being stopped in spite of the loss.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R normal big hit” or “5R normal big hit” (the received display result designation command designates display result 2 designation command or display result 3 designation). In the case of a command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even symbols as the stop symbols. When the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” or “5R probability variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command). The CPU 101 for effect control determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbols. When the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 6 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 suddenly changes as a stop symbol. A jackpot symbol (for example, a combination of symbols “135”) is determined.

  In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a normal notice effect setting process for setting the notice effect (step S8003). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes process table selection processing according to the variation pattern or the like (step S8004). The specific operation of the process table selection process will be described later. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled.

  The process table shown in FIG. 45 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern and notice effect. If it is decided to execute the notice effect in the process of step S8004 or the like, the data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not decided to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  Also, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  Here, in this embodiment, the image data related to the fluctuation-corresponding display in the fluctuation-corresponding display area 180 and the hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold storage display unit 18d is set in the process table. Instead, it is created by the production control CPU 101 and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM. The VDP 109 executes the display control set in the process table and the image data of a predetermined area related to the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display area 180, the hold display in the first hold memory display unit 18c and the second hold memory display unit 18d. A signal based on the data obtained by superimposing the image data based on the data is output to the effect display device 9. In this way, the effect control device 9 displays the background image and effect symbol in the variation of the effect symbol, and the change correspondence display and the hold display.

  After step S8005, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S8006). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007). Next, the production control CPU 101 is a first start winning command set stored in the start winning command storage area (a design designation command of the storage area 1, a variation category command, and a pending storage number addition designation command, The oldest determination result) is deleted, and the contents of the storage area after the start winning command storage area are shifted one by one (step S8008). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect symbol variation display in synchronization with the first special symbol variation display (specifically, when the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set). Includes a first start winning command set stored in the first start winning command storage area (the design designation command of the storage area 1, the variable category command, and the first reserved storage number addition designation command, The old determination result) is deleted, and the contents of the storage areas after the first start winning command storage area are shifted one by one. Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), the second start winning prize is obtained. Delete the first start winning command set stored in the hour command storage area (storing area 1 symbol designation command, variable category command, and second reserved memory number addition designation command, the oldest judgment result) Then, the contents of the storage area after the second start winning command storage area are shifted one by one.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control stores the contents (first special mode flag value, second special mode flag) associated with the variation corresponding display, each first hold display, and each second hold display in the effect flag table (FIG. 36). Value, first special mode flag value, and second special mode flag value) are shifted (step S8009). Specifically, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol (specifically, when the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), The storage contents associated with the 1 hold display 1 are shifted to the storage contents associated with the fluctuation corresponding display, and the storage contents associated with the first hold displays 2 to 4 are associated with the first hold displays 1 to 3, respectively. Shift to the stored contents. Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), the second hold display The memory content associated with 1 is shifted to the memory content associated with the fluctuation-corresponding display, and the memory content associated with the second hold displays 2-4 is stored with the memory contents associated with the second hold displays 1-3, respectively. Shift to.

  Here, in this embodiment, the hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag associated with the first hold display 1 or the second hold display 1 are associated with the change corresponding display after the stored contents are shifted. In step S1003, S1004, and step S1006 of the pre-reading effect determination process described above, when checking whether the hold change effect flag or the background change effect flag is set, the first hold display or the second hold Whether or not the hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag are set is set not only for the display but also for the change corresponding display corresponding to the change display for which the start condition is satisfied. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the stored contents of the variation-corresponding display to determine whether or not the variation-corresponding display is in a special mode and a mode (first (first)) It is possible to confirm the special mode or the second special mode), and whether or not the background image is a special mode and the mode (the first special mode or the second special mode) when the background image is a special mode.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 shifts the hold display displayed in the first hold storage display unit 18c or the second hold storage display unit 18d to the change corresponding display area 180 (displays the change display as a change corresponding display). ) And the hold display displayed thereafter are shifted one by one (step S8010). That is, the object is displayed in the display area where the display flag in the display control table is set. Here, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first hold storage display unit 18c or the second hold storage display unit 18d is maintained even when the display mode is shifted to the fluctuation corresponding display area 180. It is assumed that the display mode is maintained even when the hold display displayed thereafter is shifted.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8011).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received in a normal state, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed regardless of whether or not the predetermined command (display result designation command, background designation command) is normally received. (N in steps S2601, S8001 to S8011) On the other hand, if the predetermined command (display result designation command, background designation command) is not normally received even if the variation pattern command is received in the probability variation state, the production is performed. The symbols are not displayed in a variable manner (Y in step S2601; S2602 to S2607). Note that the display result designation command reception flag is not set in step S2602, and when the process proceeds to step S2607, if it is set, the background designation command reception flag is reset.

  In the present embodiment, the display result designation command is normally received as a condition for variably displaying the production symbol when the variation pattern command is received in the probability variation state (hereinafter referred to as “first condition”). )), The background designation command has been received normally (hereinafter referred to as “second condition”), and the contents of the received variation pattern command and display result designation command are consistent (hereinafter referred to as “third”). Condition ”) (see steps S2602, S2603, and S2606). However, it is not always necessary to satisfy all of the first condition to the third condition. For example, only one of the conditions may be provided, or a plurality of conditions may be provided. It may be a thing.

  For example, if the variable pattern command includes information indicating the variable symbol display result of the special symbol (whether it is a big hit or a big hit type), the variable indication of the effect symbol is displayed even if the first condition is not satisfied. It is good to do. Specifically, when it is recognizable from the variation pattern command as to whether or not it is a big hit as in the present embodiment, it is possible to start the variable display of the production symbol even if the first condition is not satisfied. . At that time, when it is possible to recognize that the variable display result is a big hit, but it is impossible to recognize the big hit type, the big hit type having a low advantage to the player (for example, 5R normal big hit, 5R probability big hit) It is desirable to stop display the jackpot symbol. This is because, if a jackpot symbol of a big hit type with high advantage (for example, 15R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit) is stopped and displayed, a big hit type with low advantage to the player (for example, 5R normal big hit) This is to prevent the player from being discouraged in the case of 5R probability variation big hit).

  Also, for example, if the variation pattern command includes information indicating the gaming state (whether it is a normal state or a certain variation state), the effect symbol is variably displayed even if the second condition is not satisfied. It is good as well. Specifically, if the variation pattern selected by the game control microcomputer 560 is different for each gaming state and a variation pattern command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is transmitted, the effect control micro computer Since the computer 100 can recognize the information indicating the gaming state even if the second condition is not satisfied, it may be possible to perform variable display of the effect symbols.

  Further, for example, when the variable pattern command does not include information indicating the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol command may be started even if the third condition is not satisfied. In addition, when it is not a condition that the display result designation command is normally received, the variable display of the effect symbols may be started even if the third condition is not satisfied.

(Process table selection processing (step S8004), FIG. 46)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing process table selection processing (step S8004). In the process table selection process, the effect control CPU 101 first refers to the effect flag table and confirms whether or not the first special mode flag (flag in fine weather mode) corresponding to other than the change display is set (see FIG. Step S2040). In this embodiment, the process table selection process (step S8004) is executed before the effect flag table is shifted (step S8009) (see FIG. 43). Therefore, in the process table selection process, when determining whether or not the background change effect accompanying the change display to be executed thereafter is executed, the background change effect flag other than the change corresponding display is checked. ing.

  If the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display of the effect flag table is set (Y in step S2040), the CPU 101 for effect control has a process table corresponding to the change pattern and the background change effect of the first special mode. Is selected (step S2041), and the process table selection process is terminated. Thereby, the background image of a production | presentation symbol will be in the mode of fine weather mode in the variable display performed.

  If the first special mode flag corresponding to a display other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is not set (N in step S2040), then the effect control CPU 101 performs the first corresponding to the display other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table. It is confirmed whether or not the 2 special mode flag (lightning strike mode flag) is set (step S2042). If the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S2042), the effect control CPU 101 determines the process table corresponding to the change pattern and the background change effect of the second special mode. Is selected (step S2043), and the process table selection process is terminated. Thereby, the background image of a production | presentation symbol becomes a mode of a lightning strike mode in the fluctuation display performed.

  If the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is not set (N in step S2042), that is, the background change effect flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is set at all. If not, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern without the background change effect (step S2045), and ends the process table selection process. When selecting a process table that does not involve a background change effect, a process table that becomes a background image corresponding to the gaming state may be selected. For example, if a background image corresponding to each of the high probability high base state, the low probability high base state, and the low probability low base state is prepared and the background change effect is not accompanied, the current game state is selected. A background image process table may be selected.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S861). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S867. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S866. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S868. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S861 is a stage in which the fanfare effect has not yet been executed although the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S862 Without moving to step S867.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disconnected symbol or jackpot symbol) (step S862). The production control CPU 101 may perform control to stop and display the production symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the big hit symbol is displayed in step S862 (Y in step S863), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S866) and the fanfare flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag to big hit start 5). It is confirmed whether any one of the designated command reception flags is set (step S867). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S867), the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S868) and selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S869). Then, the process timer is started (step S870).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S871). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S4040.

  When the big hit symbol is not displayed in step S863 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed: N in step S863), the presentation control CPU 101 proceeds to the mode extension determination process (step S4020). This mode extension determination process will be described later. Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S864). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a command reception flag such as a display result designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, immediately after confirming the variation pattern command reception flag, the variation pattern command The reception flag may be reset).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S865). Then, control goes to a step S4040.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 deletes the variation corresponding display displayed in the variation corresponding display area 180 of the effect display device 9 (step S4040). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets all effect flags corresponding to the change correspondence display in the effect flag table (step S4041).

(Mode extension determination process (step S4020), FIG. 48)
In the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is also executed while the background change effect (continuous effect) is being executed, the background change effect being executed is continued until the variable display corresponding to the hold change effect ends. The production control CPU 101 performs a mode extension determination process. Hereinafter, the mode extension determination process will be specifically described.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a specific process of the mode extension determination process (step S4020). First, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the effect flag table (FIG. 36) and confirms whether or not the background change effect flag corresponding to the change-corresponding display is set (step S4060). If the effect change effect flag is not set (N in step S4060), effect control CPU 101 ends the mode extension determination process.

  When the background change effect flag corresponding to the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S4060), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the hold change effect flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display is set. (Step S4061). If the hold change effect flag is not set (N in step S4061), the effect control CPU 101 ends the mode extension determination process.

  When the pending change effect flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S4061), the effect control CPU 101 first checks the background change effect flag corresponding to the change corresponding display. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the first special mode flag is set (step S4062). This process means that it is confirmed whether or not the change display being executed at that time is accompanied by a background change effect.

  When the flag of the first special mode corresponding to the change correspondence display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S4062), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S4062A. Here, the production control CPU 101 displays the first hold display (the first hold display 1 when the first special symbol variation display is terminated, and the second hold display when the second special symbol variation display is terminated. It is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation display corresponding to 1) is a big hit other than 15R, that is, a 5R normal big hit, a 5R probability variation big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit (step S4062A). Specifically, with reference to the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the command storage area at the start winning prize, symbol 3 designation (5R normal jackpot designation), symbol 5 designation (5R probability variable jackpot designation), symbol 6 designation ( (Sudden probability change big hit designation) or any of the above (design 1 designation (outgoing designation), design 2 designation (15R normal big hit designation), design 4 designation (15R probability variation big hit designation)) Check. The symbol designation commands corresponding to the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area are symbol 3 designation (5R normal jackpot designation), symbol 5 designation (5R probability variation jackpot designation), symbol 6 designation (sudden probability variation jackpot designation). If any one of them is satisfied (Y in step S4062A), the effect control CPU 101 ends the mode extension determination process. By doing in this way, when the variable display which becomes big hits other than 15R is performed, it can avoid performing the background change effect of the 1st special mode (clear sky mode). That is, when a big hit is made in the first special mode (sunny mode), control is always made so as to be a big hit of 15R. When the player becomes a big hit at the time of the variable display accompanied by the background change effect in the first special mode (clear sky mode), the player expects to be a big hit of 15R in advance, and can improve the interest.

  The production control CPU 101 displays the first hold display (the first hold display 1 when the first special symbol variation display is terminated, and the second hold display 1 when the second special symbol variation display is terminated). When the corresponding fluctuation display does not become a big hit other than 15R (N in step S4062A), specifically, the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area is symbol 1 designation (offset designation), In the case of either symbol 2 designation (15R normal jackpot designation) or symbol 4 designation (15R probability variable jackpot designation), the effect control CPU 101 performs the first special corresponding to the first hold display in the effect flag table. An aspect flag is set (step S4063). Thereby, the background image of the variable display performed next becomes a 1st special aspect (clear sky mode).

  On the other hand, if the flag of the first special mode corresponding to the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is not set (N in step S4062), that is, if the flag of the second special mode is set, the effect control The CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S4062B. Here, the production control CPU 101 displays the first hold display (the first hold display 1 when the first special symbol variation display is terminated, and the second hold display when the second special symbol variation display is terminated. It is confirmed whether or not the variable display corresponding to 1) is usually a big hit (step S4062B). Specifically, referring to the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area, whether it corresponds to the symbol 2 designation (15R normal jackpot designation) or the symbol 3 designation (5R normal jackpot designation), Also, it is confirmed whether it corresponds to any of the above (design 1 designation (disconnection designation), design 4 designation (15R probability variation big hit designation), symbol 5 designation (5R probability variation big hit designation), symbol 6 designation (sudden probability variation big hit designation)). When the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area corresponds to either symbol 2 designation (15R normal jackpot designation) or symbol 3 designation (5R normal jackpot designation) (in step S4062B). Y) The effect control CPU 101 ends the mode extension determination process. By doing so, it is possible to avoid executing the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode) when the variable display that is usually a big hit is executed. That is, when a big hit is made in the second special mode (lightning strike mode), the control is always performed so that the probability variation big hit is obtained. When the player wins a big hit at the time of the variable display accompanied by the background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode), the player expects that it will be a big hit of 15R in advance, and can improve the interest.

  The production control CPU 101 displays the first hold display (the first hold display 1 when the first special symbol variation display is terminated, and the second hold display 1 when the second special symbol variation display is terminated). When the corresponding fluctuation display is not normally a big hit (N in step S4062B), specifically, the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the command storage area at the start winning prize is the designation of the symbol 4 (15R probability variable big hit designation). In the case of either design 5 designation (5R probability variation big hit designation) or symbol 6 designation (sudden probability variation big hit designation), that is, in the case of probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 101 is the first in the effect flag table. The second special mode flag corresponding to the on-hold display is set (step S4064). Thereby, the background image of the variable display to be executed next becomes the second special mode (lightning strike mode).

  In this way, by executing the mode extension determination process for extending the background change effect, when the hold change effect is also executed while the background change effect is being executed, the background change effect being executed is changed to the hold change effect. It will continue until the corresponding variable display is completed. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the background change effect ends before the pending change effect is being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In step S4063 and step S4064 of the mode extension determination process, the background change effect flag of the first special mode or the second special mode corresponding to the first hold display 1 or the second hold display 1 is set to change the background change. The effect is processed until the next first hold display or the second hold display fluctuating display is performed, but in correspondence with the first hold display or the second hold display in which the flag of the hold change effect is set, The same processing is possible even if this background change effect flag is set.

(Specific examples of hold change effects and background change effects)
Next, specific examples of the hold change effect and the background change effect of the present embodiment will be described with reference to explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the hold change effect and the background change effect shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 show a first case in which the hold change effect is executed first and the background change effect is executed later. FIGS. 51 and 52 show that the background change effect is executed first and the hold change effect is shown later. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on the effect display apparatus 9 in the 2nd case performed, respectively.

  First, the effect image of the first case will be described. As shown in FIG. 49 (a), first, the first hold memory number is 3, and the variable display is executed in a state where the three hold displays in the normal mode are displayed on the first hold memory display unit 18c. Shall. In this state, it is assumed that an effective start winning is made to the first start winning opening 13 and the first reserved memory number becomes four. Then, in the determination at the time of starting winning, it is determined that there is a deviation (design designation command is designated as a deviation), and neither the holding change effect nor the background change effect is executed, so that the winning determination process (step S1005) is executed, It is assumed that it is determined that the hold change effect of the first special mode (“heat” character) is executed using the winning determination table (FIG. 35). As a result, the production control CPU 101 sets the first special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 4 of the production flag table in accordance with the execution of the hold change production of the first special mode. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the fourth hold display is displayed with the “heat” character in the first special mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the display result of the variable display (here, “285” off symbol) is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 18c is shifted. The first pending storage number decreases from 4 to 3. At this time, since the first hold display is shifted, the flags in the effect flag table (see FIG. 36) are also shifted. The fourth hold display displayed with the “heat” character in the first special mode is displayed as the third hold display.

  In this state, it is assumed that an effective start winning is generated in the first start winning opening 13 and the first reserved memory number is increased from 3 to 4. Then, it is determined that the 15R probability variation jackpot is determined at the time of starting winning (design designation command is 15R probability variation jackpot designation), and the pending change effect has already been executed, so that the background change effect determination process (step S1009) is executed, It is determined that the background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is executed using the background change effect determination table (FIG. 40) in which the ratio of executing the background change effect is higher than the winning determination table. It shall be assumed. The effect control CPU 101 sets a second special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 4 of the effect flag table in accordance with the execution of the background change effect in the second special mode. Note that the hold change effect of the first special mode is already being executed, and the flag of the first special mode is set in the effect flag table, so that the hold change effect is not further executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 (e), the fourth hold display is displayed in the normal mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (f), the display result of the variable display (here, the symbol of “376”) is derived and displayed.

  Then, the next variable display is started, and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 18c is shifted. The first pending storage number decreases from 4 to 3. Here, the flag of the background change effect of the second special mode corresponding to the first hold display 3 of the updated effect flag table is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 49G, the effect control CPU 101 executes a background change effect that displays the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the second special mode (lightning strike mode).

  As described above, when the hold change effect is being executed, it is determined to execute the background change effect at a higher rate than when the hold change effect is not being executed. Is increased in parallel, and the player's interest can be preferably improved. Also, in this embodiment, when a start change is made, if a hold change effect is executed targeting a change display executed before the change display corresponding to the start win, the start win is supported. The ratio of executing the background change effect with the changed display as a target is increased, so that the background change effect is continuously executed even after the hold change effect ends. Even if there is, the player's expectation can be maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, even when the variation corresponding display in the variation corresponding display area 180 is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, the ratio of executing the background change effect is increased. Therefore, the player's interest can be preferably improved by both the display mode of the change correspondence display and the background change effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (h), FIG. 50 (i), and FIG. 50 (j), the derivation display of the display result of the twice variation display accompanied by the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode). , And the hold display shift of the first hold storage display unit 18c is executed. After the derivation display of the display result of the variable display shown in FIG. 50 (j), the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 18c is shifted as shown in FIG. 50 (k), and the hold display of the first special mode is performed. Are shifted to the fluctuation corresponding display area 180. As a result, the fluctuation corresponding display is displayed in the first special mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 50 (l), since the symbol designating command is the non-designated designation for the variation display that is the target of the on-hold change effect of the first special display ("heat" character), as described above. In addition, the display result of the variable display becomes a deviated symbol (here, a deviated symbol of “597”).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (m), the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the background change effect is shifted to the variable display area, and the variable display is started. In the determination at the time of starting winning, the symbol designation command corresponding to this variation display is symbol 4 designation (15R probability variation big hit designation) as described above, and the second special mode flag corresponding to variation corresponding display in the effect flag table is set. It is in the set state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (n), the variable display accompanied by the background change effect and the reach effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is executed, and as shown in FIG. The jackpot symbol (here “777”) is derived and displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the control is performed so as to be a big hit of 15R whenever a big hit is caused by the variable display accompanied by the background change effect in the first special mode (clear sky mode). As a result, the player expects that a big hit will occur especially in the variable display accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode, thereby improving the player's interest in the background image and improving the gaming interest. be able to. Further, in this embodiment, the control is performed so as to be surely a big hit in the case of a big hit in a variable display accompanied by a background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode). As a result, the player expects that a big hit will occur especially in the variable display accompanied by the background change effect of the second special mode, thereby improving the player's interest in the background image and improving the game entertainment. be able to.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since the background change effect that is a continuous effect is executed as a pre-read effect, the player can change the start condition not being satisfied by executing the background change effect. The display has a sense of expectation that a big hit will occur, and the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the big win is made in the determination at the time of the start winning prize, the holding change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is determined to be out of play, and the 15R big hit is made in the determination at the time of the start winning prize. When it is determined that the background change effect of the first special mode is executed at a higher rate than when it is determined that it is a big hit other than 15R. That is, it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is generated by the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to suggest whether or not the 15R big hit is caused by the background image. Therefore, both the display mode of the hold display and the background image Can effectively enhance the player's expectation and further enhance the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a big hit is made in the determination at the time of starting winning, the holding change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is determined to be out of play, and the probability variation big win is determined in the determination at the time of starting winning. When it is determined, the background change effect of the second special mode is executed at a higher rate than when it is determined that it is normally a big hit. That is, since it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is generated by the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is likely to be caused by the background image, both the display mode of the hold display and the background image Can effectively enhance the player's expectation and further enhance the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the big win other than 15R is determined in the determination at the time of the start winning and it is determined to execute the background change effect of the first special mode, the variation display corresponding to the start winning is displayed. The background change effect of the first special mode is terminated before it is executed. Therefore, the player can expect the background change effect of the first special mode to continue as long as possible, and can further improve the interest of the background change effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a normal big hit is made in the determination at the time of the start winning and it is determined to execute the background change effect of the second special mode, the variable display corresponding to the start winning is executed. The background change effect of the second special mode is terminated before the first. Therefore, the player comes to expect that the background change effect of the second special mode will continue as long as possible, and can further improve the interest of the background change effect.

  Next, the effect image of the second case will be described. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), first, the first hold memory number is 2, and the variable display is executed in a state where two normal hold displays are displayed on the first hold memory display unit 18c. Shall. In this state, it is assumed that an effective start winning is generated in the first start winning opening 13 and the first reserved memory number is three. Then, in the determination at the time of starting winning, it is determined that there is a deviation (design designation command is designated as a deviation), and neither the holding change effect nor the background change effect is executed, so that the winning determination process (step S1005) is executed, It is assumed that the background change effect in the first special mode (sunny mode) is determined to be executed using the winning determination table (FIG. 35). As a result, the production control CPU 101 sets the first special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 3 of the production flag table in accordance with the execution of the background change production of the first special mode. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the third hold display is displayed in the normal mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the display result of the variable display (here, the “178” off symbol) is derived and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), while the next variable display is started, the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 18c is shifted, and the first hold storage number decreases from 3 to 2. In addition, the first hold display is shifted, and the flags in the effect flag table are also shifted. At this time, since the background change effect flag of the first special mode flag (clear sky mode) corresponding to the first hold display 2 of the effect flag table is set by the previous effective start winning, the effect control CPU 101 Change the image to a clear sky mode and start the variable display.

  In this state, it is assumed that the effective start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs twice and the first reserved memory number is increased from 2 to 4. Then, the judgment at the first start winning prize is judged as a deviation (design designation command is designated as a deviation), and the judgment at the second start prize is judged as 15R normal big hit (the design designation command is designated as 15R normal big hit). Shall. At this time, in the determination at the time of the second start winning, the background change effect is already executed, so that the hold change effect determination process (step S1007) is executed, and the hold change effect is executed more than the winning determination table. It is assumed that the hold change effect of the second special mode (flame effect) is determined to be executed using the hold change effect determination table (FIG. 38) in which the ratio of the change is increased. The CPU 101 for effect control sets the second special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 4 of the effect flag table in accordance with the determination of the hold change effect of the second special mode in the second effective start winning. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the third hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and the fourth hold display is displayed in the second special mode (flame effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the display result of the variable display (here, the symbol “634” is deviated) is derived and displayed.

  As described above, when the background change effect is being executed, it is determined to execute the hold change effect at a higher rate than when the background change effect is not being executed. Is increased in parallel, and the player's interest can be preferably improved. Also, in this embodiment, when a start winning prize is given, if a background change effect is executed targeting a variable display executed before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, the start prize is supported. The ratio of executing the hold change effect with the changed display as a target has been increased, so that the hold change effect is continuously executed even after the change display that has been the target of the background change effect in the judgment at the start winning prize is finished. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the change display that is the target of the background change effect in the determination at the time of winning the start is completed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 18c is shifted. At this time, the first reserved storage number decreases from 4 to 3. Here, the flag of the background change effect in the first special mode corresponding to the first hold display 1 in the updated effect flag table is set. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the background change effect for displaying the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the first special mode (clear sky mode). Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (h), the display result of the variable display (here, the “397” off symbol) is derived and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (i), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 18c is shifted. At this time, the first reserved storage number decreases from 3 to 2. Here, the 1st special mode flag corresponding to the change corresponding | compatible display of the production | presentation flag table after an update is set. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the background change effect for displaying the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the first special mode (clear sky mode). Here, in the variation correspondence display area 180, a variation correspondence display corresponding to the variation display determined as the target of the background change effect at the time of starting winning is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (j), the display result of the variable display (here, the symbol of “246” is derived) is derived and displayed.

  Thereby, the variable display determined as the target of the background change effect at the time of starting winning is completed. At this time, there is no reserved memory that is the target of the background change effect. However, since the hold change effect flag (second special mode flag) corresponding to the first hold display 2 of the effect flag table is set at this time, the effect control CPU 101 performs the mode extension determination process (step of FIG. 47). The process (step S4063) which makes the background image of the variable display performed next in S4020 and FIG. 48 a 1st special aspect is performed. Thus, the first special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 1 of the effect flag table is set.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (k), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 18c is shifted. At this time, the first reserved memory number decreases from 2 to 1. Here, the 1st special mode flag corresponding to the change corresponding | compatible display of the production | presentation flag table after an update is set. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the background change effect for displaying the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the first special mode (clear sky mode). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (l), the display result of the variable display (here, the symbol of “875” is derived) is derived and displayed.

  At this time, there is no longer any reserved memory that is subject to the background change effect. However, since the hold change effect flag (second special mode flag) corresponding to the first hold display 1 of the effect flag table is set at this time, the effect control CPU 101 performs the mode extension determination process (step of FIG. 47). The process (step S4063) which makes the background image of the variable display performed next in S4020 and FIG. 48 a 1st special aspect is performed. Thus, the first special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 1 of the effect flag table is set. In the next variable display to be executed, the 15R normal big hit is performed as described above, and thus the process of setting the background image as the first special mode (step S4063) is executed. In the case of a normal big hit, 5R probability change big hit or sudden probability change big hit, the process (step S4063) in which the background image of the variation display to be executed next is set to the first special mode (Y in step S4062A) is avoided. The change effect is not executed at the next fluctuation display, but ends at the fluctuation display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (m), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 18c is shifted. At this time, the first reserved storage number decreases from 1 to 0. Here, the 1st special mode flag corresponding to the change corresponding | compatible display of the production | presentation flag table after an update is set. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the background change effect for displaying the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the first special mode (clear sky mode). Here, the fluctuation corresponding display area 180 displays the fluctuation corresponding display of the second special mode (flame effect). In the determination at the time of starting winning, the symbol designation command corresponding to this variation display is symbol 2 designation (15R normal jackpot designation) as described above, and the first special mode flag corresponding to the variation correspondence display in the effect flag table is set. It is in the set state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (n), the variable display with the background change effect and the reach effect in the first special mode (clear sky mode) is executed, and as shown in FIG. The jackpot symbol (here “222”) is derived and displayed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the change display related to the end of the background change effect is executed (when the background change effect flag corresponding to the change corresponding display is set), the hold change effect is executed. When the hold change effect is executed, the background change effect is continued for the next variable display to be executed. This prevents only the background change effect from ending when the hold change effect is being executed, and suppresses a decrease in interest.

  FIG. 53 is a timing chart when the predetermined command is not normally received. The timing chart shown in FIG. 53 shows the timing of whether or not the special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display, whether or not the effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 9, and whether the probability variation state flag and the short-time state flag are ON / OFF. Shown for each.

  FIG. 53A shows a timing chart in a normal state. In the timing chart of FIG. 53 (A), at the timing a1 when the special symbol variable display is started, the game control microcomputer 560 sends the variation pattern command, the background designation command, The display result specifying command is transmitted. At this time, when the variation pattern command is normally received by the production control microcomputer 100 and the background designation command and the display result designation command are not received, the probability variation state flag and the time reduction state flag are OFF, and therefore Variable display starts. Then, at the end timing a2 of the variable symbol variable display, the variable symbol variable display is also ended.

  FIG. 53B shows a timing chart in the probability variation state or the short time state. In the timing chart of FIG. 53 (B), at the timing b1 when the special symbol variable display is started, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a variation pattern command, a background designation command, The display result specifying command is transmitted. At this time, when the variation pattern command is normally received by the production control microcomputer 100 and the background designation command and the display result designation command are not received, the probability variation state flag or the time reduction state flag is ON, so Variable display does not start. Then, the variable symbol variable display ends at timing b2 when the variable display time has elapsed. As described above, when the variation pattern command is received but the background designation command and the display result designation command cannot be normally received, the variable display of the effect design is executed in the normal state, while in the probability variation state or the short time state. If there is, it is configured not to execute the variable display of the effect symbol. FIG. 53 shows a case where neither the background designation command nor the display result designation command among the predetermined commands has been normally received, but the same is true even when only one of the predetermined commands has been normally received. Will behave.

  Next, in FIG. 54 to FIG. 57, a timing chart for each pattern when the variable display of the effect symbols is not executed will be described. Each timing chart shown in FIG. 54 to FIG. 57 shows control for each timing in the probability variation state or the short time state (presence / absence of variable display of special symbol in special symbol display, presence / absence of variable display of effect symbol in effect display device 9, jackpot Whether or not a game is executed).

  FIG. 54 is a timing chart in the pattern in which the symbol confirmation designation command is normally received. First, at the timing c1 at which the special symbol variable display is started, the variation pattern command, the background designation command, and the display result designation command are normally received by the production control microcomputer 100, whereby the production symbol variable display is performed. Be started. Then, at the timing c2 when the special symbol variable display is stopped and displayed with the off symbol, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the off symbol “271”.

  Then, at the timing c3 when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the variation control command is normally received by the effect control microcomputer 100, but the background designation command and the display result designation command are normally received. Due to the absence, the variable symbol “271” displayed from the timing c2 to the timing c3 is displayed as it is without performing the variable display of the effect symbol. When the symbol determination designation command is normally received at timing c4 when the variable symbol special display ends, the effect symbol is switched to “438” based on the variation pattern command.

  FIG. 55 is a timing chart in a pattern in which the symbol waiting designation command is normally received without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command normally. First, at the timing d1 when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variation control command, the background designation command, and the display result designation command are normally received by the production control microcomputer 100, whereby the production symbol variable display is performed. Be started. Then, at the timing d2 when the special symbol variable display is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the off symbol “271”.

  Then, at the timing d3 when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the variation control command is normally received by the production control microcomputer 100, but the background specifying command and the display result specifying command are normally received. Due to the absence, variable display of the effect symbol is not executed, and the off symbol “271” displayed from timing d2 to timing d3 is displayed as it is. The symbol “271” is continuously displayed when the symbol confirmation designation command is not normally received at the timing d4 when the variable symbol special display ends, and at the timing d5 when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received. The production symbol is switched to the off symbol “483”.

  FIG. 56 is a timing chart in a pattern in which the symbol change designation command is not normally received and the next variation pattern command is normally received. First, at the timing e1 when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable pattern command, the background designation command, and the display result designation command are normally received by the production control microcomputer 100, whereby the production symbol variable display is performed. Be started. Then, at the timing e2 when the special symbol variable display is stopped and displayed with the off symbol, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the off symbol “271”.

  Then, at the timing e3 when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the variation control command is normally received by the production control microcomputer 100, but the background specifying command and the display result specifying command are normally received. Due to the absence, the variable symbol “271” displayed from the timing e2 to the timing e3 is displayed as it is without executing the variable display of the effect symbol. Then, the symbol confirmation designation command is not normally received at the timing e4 when the variable symbol special display ends and the symbol “271” is continuously displayed, and the fluctuation pattern command and background in the next variable symbol variable display are displayed. At the timing e5 when the designation command and the display result designation command are normally received, the effect symbol indicating that the variable display is being performed is switched, and the effect symbol is variably displayed until the timing e6 when the variable symbol special display ends. Note that at the timing e5, after switching to a once-off symbol, it may be switched to an effect symbol indicating that variable display is being performed.

  FIG. 57 is a timing chart in a pattern in which the symbol confirmation designation command is not normally received and the jackpot start designation command is normally received. First, at the timing f1 when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable pattern command, the background designation command, and the display result designation command are normally received by the production control microcomputer 100, whereby the production symbol variable display is performed. Be started. Then, at the timing f2 when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the off symbol “271”.

  Then, at the timing f3 when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the variation control command is normally received by the effect control microcomputer 100, but the background designation command and the display result designation command are normally received. Due to the absence, the variable symbol “271” displayed from the timing f2 to the timing f3 is displayed as it is without executing the variable display of the effect symbol. Then, the symbol confirmation designation command is not normally received at the timing f4 when the variable symbol special display ends, and the symbol “271” is continuously displayed, and the fanfare is received at the timing f5 when the jackpot start designation command is received. Switching to a production image. At timing f5, after switching to the big hit symbol, it may be switched to the fanfare effect image.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating a variable display time of identification information is received in a normal state, a predetermined command cannot be received. In addition, while executing the variable display of the effect symbol, when receiving a variable display time command in a gaming state (for example, a probability variation state or a short time state) more advantageous to the player than the normal state, the predetermined command is normally received. As a condition, the variable display of the effect design is executed. Thereby, the process according to a condition is realizable. If the configuration is such that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed even when the predetermined command is not normally received, there is a possibility that the contents of the effect may be inconsistent, but the variable symbol display is being executed. However, if the variable display of the effect symbols is not executed, the player feels uncomfortable or distrustful. Therefore, in the normal state in which variable display for a longer time than the probability change state or the short-time state is easy to execute, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed by executing the variable display of the effect symbol even in a state where the predetermined command cannot be normally received. Suppressing giving the player a sense of discomfort or disbelief due to not being executed for a long time, but it is not possible to receive a predetermined command normally in the probabilistic state or the short time state in which variable display for a shorter time than the normal state is easy In such a case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in the contents of the effect by configuring so that the variable display of the effect symbol is not executed. Also, since the variable display for a shorter time than the normal state is easy to be executed in the probability variation state or the short time state, it is possible to suppress discomfort and distrust due to the fact that the variable display of the production symbol is not executed, at least compared to the normal state. it can.

  Also, it is assumed that a gaming state with a high degree of attention by the player (for example, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a gaming state in which variable display of identification information for a shorter time than the normal state is easy to be executed, and a normal state) If a variable display that is unstable in a different game state (for example, a variable display in which the variable display result of the special symbol and the variable display result of the production symbol are different) is executed, the variable display that is unstable in the normal state is displayed. There is a possibility that the distrust of the player is increased by the amount of attention that is higher than the execution. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an increase in distrust by preventing the variable information from being displayed when the predetermined command cannot be normally received in a gaming state with a high degree of attention by the player. A corresponding process can be realized.

  The case where the production control microcomputer 100 cannot normally receive the command from the game control microcomputer 560 is, for example, when the command is missed (the production control microcomputer 100 transmits a command, (When the production control microcomputer 100 cannot receive the command). Further, for example, the command transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 100 is received by the effect control microcomputer 100 as data that the effect control microcomputer 100 cannot recognize as a command. The data that cannot be recognized as a command by the production control microcomputer 100 is data that cannot be normally read due to noise or the like (so-called bit error). In addition, even if the received data can be recognized as a command, the command is a command that should not be transmitted in a controlled manner, or the order of received commands is different from the normal order. Is also included as a case where the command cannot be received normally.

  In the present embodiment, when a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating a variable display time of identification information is received in the normal state, a state command (for example, background) indicating the gaming state being controlled. When the variable display time command is received in the game state (for example, the probability change state or the short time state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state while executing the variable display of the effect symbol even if the specified command) is not received, The variable display of the effect design is executed on condition that the status command is normally received. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed in a situation where the state command cannot be normally received in a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state.

  In this embodiment, when a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating a variable display time of identification information is received in a normal state, a result command (for example, a display result) indicating a display result of variable display When the variable display time command is received in the game state (for example, the probability change state or the short time state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state while executing the variable display of the effect symbol even if the specified command) is not received, It was decided to perform variable display of effect symbols on the condition that the result command is received normally. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed in a situation where the result command cannot be normally received in a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) and a predetermined command (for example, a background designation command) in a gaming state (for example, a probability variation state or a short time state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Or display result designation command), when the information indicated by the variable display time command and the predetermined command (for example, display result designation command) is not consistent, the variable display of the effect design is not executed. It was decided. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed in a situation where the information indicated by the variable display time command and the predetermined command cannot be matched in a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined command (for example, a background designation command or a display result designation command) is controlled when the gaming state (for example, the probability variation state or the time-short state) is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. When the variable information is not displayed normally due to the fact that the identification information (for example, the production symbol) is not variably displayed, specific commands (for example, the symbol confirmation designation command, the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The identification information is switched based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command and the variation pattern command). Thereby, even when the variable display is not executed, the identification information displayed based on the command received later can be replaced.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been given using the probability variation state (high probability high base state) and the short time state (low probability high base state) as the gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal state. It is not a thing. For example, a high probability low base state may be used.

  Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, when a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating the variable display time of identification information is received in a normal state, a predetermined command can be received. When a variable display time command is received in a gaming state (for example, a probability variation state or a short time state) in which the variable display of the identification information for a shorter time than the normal state is easily performed while the variable display of the effect symbol is performed even if not The variable display of the effect design is executed on condition that the predetermined command is normally received. Thereby, the process according to a condition is realizable.

  In the present embodiment, when a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating a variable display time of identification information is received in the normal state, a state command (for example, background) indicating the gaming state being controlled. Even if the designated command is not received, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, while the variable display of the identification information for a shorter time than the normal state is easily executed in the game state (for example, the probability change state or the short time state). When the time command is received, the variable display of the effect design is executed on condition that the state command is normally received. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed in a situation where the state command cannot be normally received in the gaming state in which the variable display of the identification information in a time shorter than the normal state is easily performed.

  In this embodiment, when a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating a variable display time of identification information is received in a normal state, a result command (for example, a display result) indicating a display result of variable display Even if the designated command is not received, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, while the variable display of the identification information for a shorter time than the normal state is easily executed in the game state (for example, the probability change state or the short time state). When the time command is received, the variable display of the effect design is executed on condition that the result command is received normally. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed in a situation where the result command cannot be normally received in the gaming state in which the variable display of the identification information for a shorter time than the normal state is easily performed.

  In the present embodiment, a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) and a predetermined value in a gaming state (for example, a probability variation state or a short time state) in which variable display of identification information for a shorter time than the normal state is likely to be executed. Even when a command (for example, a background designation command or a display result designation command) is received, it is identified when the information indicated by the variable display time command and a predetermined command (for example, a display result designation command) cannot be matched. The variable display of information was not executed. This prevents the variable display from being executed in a situation where the information indicated by the variable display time command and the predetermined command cannot be matched in the gaming state in which the variable display of the identification information for a shorter time than the normal state is easily executed. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined command (for example, background designation) is controlled when the game state (for example, a probable variation state or a time-short state) is controlled in which variable display of identification information for a shorter time than the normal state is easily performed. If the variable display of the identification information (for example, the production symbol) is not executed because the command or the display result designation command has not been received normally, the specific command (for example, the symbol confirmation designation command, for example) based on the end of the variable display. The identification information is switched based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command, a jackpot start designation command, a variation pattern command). Thereby, even when the variable display is not executed, the identification information displayed based on the command received later can be replaced.

  In the present embodiment, description will be given using a probable state (high probability high base state) and a short time state (low probability high base state) as game states in which variable display of identification information for a shorter time than the normal state is easy to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a high probability low base state may be used.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, in the first gaming state (for example, the normal state), the variable display time command (for example, the variation pattern command) indicating the variable display time of the identification information is received. In this case, even if the predetermined command cannot be received, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, while the variable display time command (for example, the variable display time of the identification information in the second game state (for example, the probability variation state or the short time state)) When the variable pattern command) is received, the variable display of the production symbol is executed on the condition that the predetermined command is normally received, and the variable command of the identification information is not executed because the predetermined command is not normally received. Specific commands based on the end of variable display (for example, symbol confirmation designation command, customer waiting demonstration designation command, jackpot start designation command, fluctuation Turn command) based on the reception of the and configured to switch the identification information. Thereby, the process according to a condition is realizable.

  In the present embodiment, when a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating a variable display time of identification information is received in the first gaming state (for example, normal state), the gaming state being controlled Even if the status command (for example, the background designation command) indicating that it is not received, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, while the variable information display time of the identification information is displayed in the second gaming state (for example, the probability variation state or the short time state). When a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) is received, a variable display of effect symbols is executed on condition that a state command (for example, a background designation command) indicating a controlled gaming state is normally received. It was decided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed in a situation where the state command cannot be normally received in the second gaming state (for example, the probability changing state or the short time state).

  In the present embodiment, when a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating a variable display time of identification information is received in the first gaming state (for example, normal state), the display result of variable display is displayed. Even if the result command shown (for example, display result designation command) cannot be received, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, while the variable display time of the identification information is displayed in the second gaming state (for example, the probability change state or the short time state). When a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) is received, a variable display of the effect symbol is performed on condition that the result command (for example, display result designation command) indicating the display result of the variable display is normally received. I decided to do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed in a situation in which the result command cannot be normally received in the second gaming state (for example, the probability changing state or the short time state).

  In the present embodiment, in the second gaming state (for example, the probability variation state or the short time state), a variable display time command (for example, a variation pattern command) and a predetermined command (for example, a background designation command or a display result designation command) Even when the information is received, if the information indicated by the variable display time command and the predetermined command (for example, display result designation command) cannot be matched, the variable display of the identification information is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed in a situation where the information indicated by the variable display time command and the predetermined command cannot be matched in the second gaming state (for example, the probability changing state or the short time state).

  In the present embodiment, the normal state is described as the first gaming state, and the probability variation state and the short-time state are described as the second gaming state. However, the gaming state may be different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state. For example, any combination of a high probability high base state, a high probability low base state, a low probability high base state, and a low probability low base state may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the background designation command and the display result designation command are used as the predetermined command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, either the background designation command or the display result designation command is present. A command indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the probabilistic state or the short-time state, a command indicating which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to the special symbol, and increase / decrease in reserved memory Alternatively, a command indicating the number of reserved memories may be set as a predetermined command.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine in which the low probability low base state and the high probability high base state are provided as the gaming state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the high probability low base state or A low probability high base state may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is triggered by the execution of variable display a predetermined number of times (50 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as shifting from a high probability state to a low probability state triggered by the occurrence of a big hit. Similarly, the trigger for shifting from the high base state to the low base state may be that a predetermined type of jackpot occurs. Further, the trigger for shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state may be different from the trigger for shifting from the high base state to the low base state. For example, a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state triggered by occurrence of a jackpot of a predetermined type, while a transition from a high base state to a low base state triggered by executing a predetermined number of variable displays Also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the variation is not being executed, the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the previous variable display is fixed and displayed as it is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed in a rocking manner. . According to this, although the variable display of the effect symbol is not performed, it is possible to suggest to the player that the special symbol variable display is being executed. In addition, the fourth symbol may be fixedly displayed during non-execution of change, or may be displayed (for example, blinking) indicating that it is changing.

  In the present embodiment, a common variation pattern can be selected in a plurality of gaming states (normal state, short-time state and probability variation state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be selected only in one gaming state. Possible special variation patterns may be provided. Provided is an effect control microcomputer that executes variable display of effect symbols according to the received variation pattern regardless of whether or not a predetermined command (eg, background designation command, display result designation command) has been normally received. When a special variation pattern that should be selectable only in one game state is erroneously transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the effect control microcomputer in the other game state. Moreover, the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the special variation pattern is executed. In such a case, there may be a problem that the production content is inconsistent. Therefore, even in a game machine of a model provided with a special variation pattern that can be selected only in one gaming state, whether or not a predetermined command is received when the variation pattern command is received in one gaming state. Regardless of whether or not the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, when the variation pattern command is received in another gaming state, the predetermined command is normally received and the received variation pattern command is matched with the predetermined command. If the variable display of the effect symbol is executed as a condition, these problems can be solved.

  Further, in a model in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the high probability state or the high base state is finished, an effect using the number of remaining fluctuations (for example, the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed on the effect display device 9 in each variable display. In some cases, an effect of scolding the player is displayed. In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to prevent inconsistency between the actual number of remaining fluctuations and the number of remaining fluctuations displayed on the effect display device 9, so that the variable display of the effect symbols is performed as in the present embodiment. Even if it is not executed, it is desirable that the production control microcomputer be configured to be able to recognize the accurate number of remaining fluctuations.

  For example, the value of the number of remaining fluctuations used for production (hereinafter referred to as “the number of residual fluctuations for production”) shifts to a high probability state or a high base state, and the number of fluctuations to be executed before the game state is terminated. Value (predetermined, for example, 50) is set, and every time a special symbol is variably displayed, the value is subtracted by 1 so that the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. Is common. In such a type of gaming machine, it is possible to recognize the accurate number of remaining fluctuations by performing the subtraction process even when the variable display of the effect symbol is not executed when the variable symbol special display is started. Here, in the production control microcomputer 100 that executes the subtraction process of the number of remaining fluctuations for production when receiving the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is normal when the variation pattern command cannot be received normally. The case where the predetermined command is not received normally will be described.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute a subtraction process of the effect remaining variation count when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command when the change pattern command cannot be normally received. In this case, when the variation pattern command and the symbol confirmation designation command are normally received, it is necessary not to execute the subtraction process for the number of effects remaining variation times repeatedly. For example, when the variation pattern command is normally received, the subtraction process for the residual variation number for the effect is executed and the processed flag indicating that the subtraction process for the residual variation number for the effect is executed is set, and the symbol confirmation designation command is If the processed flag is set at the time of reception, the processed flag is subtracted without subtracting the effect residual fluctuation count, and if it is not set, the subtraction process of the residual fluctuation count is performed. It is good as well. Similarly, every time the special symbol variable display is performed, if the subtraction process of the residual change frequency for the production is performed once, the command other than the variation pattern command and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. It is good also as an execution opportunity of a subtraction process, and reception of three or more commands is good also as an execution opportunity of the subtraction process of the residual change frequency | count for production. In addition, as described above, if it is possible to prevent redundant execution of the subtraction process of the residual variation number for the effect in one special symbol variable display, the subtraction process of the residual variation number of the effect as described above. May be set to indicate whether or not the process has been executed, or a non-execution flag indicating that the subtraction process of the residual change frequency for performance has not been executed yet is set at the end of the variable display, and the next The non-executed flag may be reset when the subtraction process is executed in the fluctuation of

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 does not start the variable display of the production symbol itself when the fluctuation pattern command is normally received but the predetermined command cannot be normally received, but the production symbol variable display itself is not started. It is also possible to execute the subtraction process for the number of remaining effects for change at the start timing (for example, the timing when the variation pattern command is received) or the stop timing (for example, the timing when the symbol confirmation designation command is received). In addition, when the subtraction process of the residual variation number for the effect is executed at the stop timing of the variable display of the effect symbol, as in the case described above, the number of the residual variation frequency for the effect is displayed every time the special symbol variable display is performed. It is desirable not to repeatedly perform the subtraction process for the number of residual fluctuations for effects so that the subtraction process is performed once.

  In addition, in a gaming machine that performs a continuous notice effect that is a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of continuous variable displays, and displays the number of times of change (the number of remaining notices) until the continuous notice effect ends. In order to recognize the remaining notice number without any trouble even when the variable display of the effect symbol is not executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the subtraction process of the remaining notice number upon receiving the variation pattern command. In addition, even when the variation pattern command cannot be normally received, the remaining notice number subtraction process may be executed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command.

  Also, commands that can recognize that the variable display time has passed without starting the variable display of the production symbol at the start of the variable display of the special symbol (for example, the symbol confirmation designation command, the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the jackpot start designation command) If it is possible to recognize that it is a big hit, but if the big hit type cannot be recognized, the big hit corresponding to the big hit type that is less advantageous to the player If the symbol is stopped and displayed, but the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type with low advantage is stopped and displayed, it is recognized that the jackpot type with high advantage is recognized by the received command. It is good also as performing the effect (what is called a promotion effect) as if it was promoted from the big hit to the big hit with high advantage. For example, the promotion effect may be performed during a predetermined round game or at the end of the big hit game. It can be said that the jackpot that shifts to the high probability state is the jackpot with higher advantage than the jackpot that shifts to the low probability state. Further, it can be said that the big hit that shifts to the high base state is the big hit with higher advantage than the big hit that shifts to the low base state. Further, it can be said that a big hit with a long transition period to a high probability state or a high base state is a big hit with higher advantage than a big hit with a short period. In addition, it can be said that the jackpot that shifts to the jackpot game where more prize balls can be expected is a jackpot that is more advantageous than the jackpot that shifts to the jackpot game where less prize balls can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the open mode of the big winning opening during the round game is the same mode (opened for 30 seconds per round). A jackpot type that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state in which the release modes are combined may be provided. Hereinafter, a modified example in which a jackpot type controlled to a jackpot gaming state in which a plurality of types of release modes are combined will be described. Note that description of the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment is omitted.

  In the present modification, as the jackpot type, there are provided a first probability variation jackpot and a second probability variation jackpot that are controlled to a 16-round jackpot gaming state. In each round game in the big hit gaming state, the effect display device 9 displays the number of rounds.

  FIG. 58 shows an open specified command table used for selecting a command to be released to be transmitted every open round (round) in accordance with the type of jackpot in the jackpot gaming state in a modified example and transmitting the command. FIG.

  The open command specification table is divided into a first probability variable hit open command command table used for the first probability variable jackpot and a second probability variable jackpot open command command table used for the second probability variable jackpot. Stored in the ROM 54. In these open command commands, a command that can specify the number of open times and the open time (long open or short open) is set for each open round (round) in the big hit gaming state. .

  In the first probability variation big hit opening designated command table shown in FIG. 58 (A), a releasing one designation command for designating long opening is selected for each of the first to sixteenth opening rounds. The data is set to As a result, in the big hit gaming state of the first probability variation big hit, for all the opening times (rounds) from the first time to the 16th time, the corresponding “opening time and long opening” can be specified during the opening 1 designation command It will be selected and transmitted.

  In the second probability variation big hit open command command table shown in FIG. 58 (B), for each of the first to tenth open times, data is set so that one open command specifying long open is selected. Is set. In the second probability variation big hit opening designation command table, for each of the eleventh to sixteenth opening times, data is set so that the two opening commands specifying short opening are selected. . As a result, in the big hit gaming state of the second probability variation big hit, for each of the first to tenth open times (rounds), the corresponding 1 open command that can specify the “open time and long open” is specified. After being selected and transmitted, for each of the eleventh to sixteenth open times (rounds), two open commands that can specify the corresponding “open time and short open” are selected and transmitted. It becomes.

  Further, in the ROM 54, in the same manner as the first probability variable big hit opening designated command table and the second probability variable big hit open designated command table of FIG. A post-opening designation command table used for selecting a post-opening designation command to be transmitted and transmitting a command is provided. The specified command table after opening is divided into a first specified command table after opening the first certainty big hit and a second specified command table after opening the second certainty big hit used at the second most probable big hit. Yes. In these post-release designation command tables, a command that can specify the number of times of opening and the opening time (long opening or short opening) is set for each opening time (round) in the big hit gaming state. . In such a post-release designation command table, data for each release time is set in a data configuration in which the data content of the command being released in FIG. 58 is directly replaced with the data content of the command after release.

  FIG. 59 shows the opening / closing pattern of the big prize opening executed, the open command transmitted, and the round on the effect display device 9 in the big hit gaming state for each of the first probability big hit and the second probability big hit in the modified example. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the number display and the control mode of the ball display on the effect display device 9. FIG. 59 (A) shows the control mode for the first probability variation big hit. FIG. 59B shows a control mode for the second probability variation big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the big hit gaming state of the first probability variation big hit, at each of the first to sixteenth open times, the big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state in a long open mode for 29 seconds. . As a result, with the first probable big hit, it is possible to substantially win a big winning opening in 16 open times, and pay out a winning ball. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), in the big hit gaming state of the second probability variation big hit, the big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state in the long opening mode for 29 seconds in each of the first to tenth opening times. Then, the big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state in a short opening mode for 0.5 seconds. As a result, in the second likelihood variation big hit, it is possible to substantially win a big winning opening and to pay out a winning ball in 10 open times.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), in the big hit gaming state, at the start of each opening round (round), the opening 1 designation command or the opening 2 designation command is a game control microcomputer 560. Sent from As an open command, a 1 open command indicating a long release is selected and transmitted at the start of a long open release cycle, and a 2 open command indicating a short release is selected at the start of a short open cycle. Sent.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), when an opening 1 designation command is received, it corresponds to information on the number of times of opening specified by the command. Thus, in the display of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9, the number of rounds of opening of the big prize opening to be executed is displayed by numerical information. For example, when the first opening is specified by the command, control is performed on the effect display device 9 to display the number of rounds indicating the first round. Thus, in the effect display device 9, the number of rounds is displayed as a predetermined notification effect.

  On the other hand, in the production control microcomputer 100, as shown in the eleventh to sixteenth releases in FIG. 59 (B), when the two specified commands during release are received, how many times the release is specified by the command. The updated display of the new round number display corresponding to such information is not performed, and the round number display indicating the original round number (the tenth round in this example) is continued. Thereby, since the number of rounds is not updated and displayed in a short open state in which a substantial winning prize opening is not obtained and a winning ball is not obtained, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. For example, if the number of rounds is updated and displayed despite the fact that the winning ball to the winning a prize is practically not obtained, the winning due to the winning in the winning a prize is obtained despite the progress of the round. Therefore, if the player's expectation is betrayed, the interest of the game is reduced. However, if the number of rounds is not updated and displayed when such a prize ball is not substantially obtained, It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by not betraying expectations. That is, according to this modification, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction due to notification.

  As the round number display, instead of displaying numerical information indicating the number of currently executed rounds, numerical information indicating the remaining number of rounds that can be executed during the big hit gaming state may be displayed.

  In addition, when the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state is indicated as the round number display, the number of icon images corresponding to the remaining number of rounds is displayed instead of numerical information, and each time a round is executed. A display for deleting the icon image may be performed. For example, during the jackpot gaming state of the second probability variation jackpot, ten icon images corresponding to the number of rounds “10” that can be actually won in the big winning opening are displayed in the first round, and the long open round is executed. You may make it perform the display control which erases an icon image whenever it is performed.

  In addition, when the remaining number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot gaming state is shown as the round number display, first, a part of the remaining round number is displayed, and then the displayed remaining round number is completely digested by executing the long open round. When a round is performed, an effect indicating whether or not the round will continue is performed, and after indicating that the round will continue, an effect control may be performed to display a part of the number of rounds that have not yet been digested. .

  In addition, when displaying the number of icon images corresponding to the remaining number of rounds as the round number display, each time a round is executed, the image color of the icon image is changed from the original image color to a specific image color (round is digested). Display color) may be performed. In addition, when displaying the number of icon images corresponding to the remaining number of rounds as the round number display, each time a round is executed, the shape of the icon image is changed from the initial image shape to a specific image shape (round is digested). (A shape indicating that) may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), the production control microcomputer 100 counts based on the received winning count designation command in the round to be executed when the 1 designation command being opened is received. In correspondence with the information on the number of balls to be played, the total value of the number of balls that have been paid out during the big hit gaming state is updated and displayed in the ball display on the effect display device 9. For example, when the number of winning balls for one winning ball detected by the count switch 23 is 15, every time a winning count designation command is received, a ball display indicating the total value of the number of balls is displayed. The device 9 performs control to display addition update display by “15”. As described above, the effect display device 9 performs control to display a ball as a profit specifying display regarding the profit given to the player during the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, as such a ball display, the number of game balls won in the special variable winning ball device 20 (big winning port) during the big hit gaming state is counted, and the winning ball to be paid out to the gaming ball is counted. An example of displaying the number is shown, but as the display of the ball to be performed during the big hit game state, a winning hole provided other than the special variable winning ball device 20 (big winning hole) (for example, for one winning ball) The number of game balls that have been won in the general winning slot (where 10 prize balls are paid out) is counted, and the counted value is added to the number of prize balls that are paid out for the winning balls in the big prize opening. May be displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in the eleventh to sixteenth releases in FIG. 59 (B), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the winning count designation command in the round to be executed when the two designation commands are being released. Even so, the control for restricting the outgoing ball display is performed so that the outgoing ball display on the effect display device 9 is not updated and displayed on the effect display device 9. Thereby, since the number of balls to be played is not updated and displayed in a short open state in which a substantial winning prize opening is not obtained and a winning ball is not obtained, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. For example, if the number of balls to be played is updated and displayed even though the winning ball for winning the winning prize is substantially not obtained, the winning ball for winning the winning prize will be displayed despite the progress of the round. Since the player's expectation is betrayed, the interest of the game is reduced, but the number of balls that can be played when such a prize ball due to winning in the big prize opening cannot be obtained substantially If the display is not updated, the player's sense of expectation is not betrayed, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In this modified example, during the round in the short open state, the round number display in the previous round is continuously displayed. As long as the number display is not performed, the display is not limited to this, and the round number display itself may not be performed during the round in the short open state.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
Next, the differences between the first embodiment and the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes the background change effect determination process (step S1009) and executes the background change effect as described in the prefetch effect determination process of FIG. (Step S1050 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the execution of the background change effect is determined not at the time of starting winning a prize but at the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation display. Thereby, compared with 1st Embodiment, 2nd Embodiment has a difference about the prefetch effect determination process at the time of start winning, and an effect design change start process. In the first embodiment, the execution ratio of the background change effect is changed according to the winning determination result (the contents of the symbol designation command). However, in the second embodiment, the execution ratio of the background change effect is described later. Is not directly changed by the winning determination result (design designation command). Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 67, the second embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the prefetch effect determination process (step S800A) of the effect control process process (FIG. 31) in the second embodiment, corresponding to the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 33) of the first embodiment. It is. The difference from the pre-reading effect determination process of the first embodiment is that when only the pending change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (N in step S1006), the effect control CPU 101 performs a process related to the determination of the background change effect. The point is that the pre-reading effect determination process is terminated without performing the process (that is, the process of step S1008 and step S1009 is not performed). In other words, when it is determined that only the hold change effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to a newly received command at the time of starting winning a normal mode that is not a special mode. Is executed (step S1020), and the pre-reading effect determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process (step S1005) of the above-described prefetch effect determining process in the second embodiment, and corresponds to the winning determination process (FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. . The difference from the winning determination process of the first embodiment is that the process for the background change effect is not included.

  In the winning determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first (1) determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect and (2) executes the hold change effect based on the winning determination table shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1020A). This process will be specifically described below.

  First, the effect control CPU 101 confirms a symbol designation command. When the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of place”, so the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 5%, The determination process for the hold change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the hold change effect of 2 special modes is 1% and the ratio of not executing the hold change effect is 94%.

  When the symbol designation command is C401 (H) to C405 (H), the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode is 10%, the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, and the hold change The determination process for the pending change effect is executed so that the ratio of the effect not being executed is 70%.

  In the present embodiment, the hold change effect of the second special mode is set to be a big hit more than the hold change effect of the first special mode, and the hold change effect of the second special mode is more set. It can be said that the reliability is higher than the hold change effect of the first special mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is decided to execute the hold change effect (step S1021A). When it is not decided to execute the hold change effect (N in Step S1021A), the effect control CPU 101 displays the new hold display on the first hold storage display unit 18c or the second hold storage display unit 18d in the normal mode. (Step S1033A) and the winning time determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the hold change effect (Y in step S1021A), the current hold memory number (first hold memory number addition designation command or second hold memory number addition designation command is received in the effect flag table. The production control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the production mode in correspondence with the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number after the addition update based on the fact (step S1022A). Then, the production control CPU 101 displays the new hold display on the first hold storage display unit 18c or the second hold storage display unit 18d in either the determined first special mode or the second special mode ( Step S1033A), the winning time determination process is terminated. The above is the prefetching effect determination process of this embodiment.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) of the effect control process (FIG. 31) in the second embodiment, corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 43) of the first embodiment. Is. The difference from the prefetching effect determination process of the first embodiment is that a variation start time determination process (step S8003A) is included immediately before the process table selection process (step S8004), and the process table selection process (step S8004). The content is changed, and the other points are the same as in the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, the variation start time determination process (step S8003A) is added as compared to the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, the background change effect is not the start winning prize but the variation start timing. This is because it is determined whether or not to perform and the effect mode in the case of executing the background change effect.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the change start time determination process (step S8003A) in the second embodiment. In this process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (step S2020). If the background change effect flag has already been set in the effect flag table (Y in step S2020), the effect control CPU 101 ends the variation start time determination process because the background change effect flag is not set again. On the other hand, when the background change effect flag is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2020), the effect control CPU 101 determines the number of reserved memories before subtraction (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number). Is confirmed to be 3 or more (step S2021). Here, in this embodiment, the number of reserved storages before subtraction is used as a reference. In this embodiment, prior to the change start time determination process, the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage number subtraction designation command is received. On the other hand, the pending storage number subtraction process is executed, while the variation start time determination process is executed at a timing when the effect flag table is not shifted (timing before execution of step S2015) as shown in FIG. Because. In other words, it is because the determination about the execution of the background change effect is made with reference to the number of reserved memories before the subtraction of the number of reserved memories accompanying the start of the change in the effect design. This condition can be replaced with a condition that the number of reserved storage after subtraction is 2 or more. If the shift of the effect flag table (step S2015) is executed before the change start time determination process is executed, the number of reserved memories after subtraction (that is, the current number of reserved memories). Is the standard.

  Here, when the number of reserved memories before subtraction is not 3 or more (N in step S2021), that is, when it is less than 3, the effect control CPU 101 ends the variation start time determination process. On the other hand, if the number of stored storage before subtraction is 3 or more (Y in step S2021), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the hold change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (step S2022). Here, when the hold change effect flag is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2022), the hold change effect flag is set in the effect flag table based on the first change start time determination table (step S2023). If it is set (Y in step S2022), based on the second change start time determination table (step S2024), the effect control CPU 101 (1) determines whether or not to execute the background change effect, and ( 2) When executing the background change effect, the effect mode is determined.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a first change start determination table according to the second embodiment. As described above, when the pending change effect flag is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2022), this first change start determination table is used. The effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect of the first special mode to 4% and the second special mode regardless of the content specified by the command at the time of starting winning such as the symbol designation command or the display result designation command. The determination process for the background change effect is executed so that the execution rate of the background change effect is 4% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 92%.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a second variation start determination table according to the second embodiment. As described above, when the pending change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S2022), the second variation start time determination table is used. The effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 10% and the second special mode in the second special mode regardless of the contents specified by the command at the time of starting winning such as the symbol designation command or the display result designation command. The determination process for the background change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect is 10% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 80%.

  Thus, when the hold change effect is being executed, the second variation start time determination table is used, which is higher than the first change start time determination table used when the hold change effect is not being executed. Since it is decided to execute the background change effect at a rate, the rate at which both the hold change effect and the background change effect are executed in parallel is increased, and the player's interest can be preferably improved. It becomes possible.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the execution of the background change effect is determined regardless of the winning determination result or the display result of the variable display to be executed. However, as described above, the execution ratio of the background change effect is changed depending on whether or not the hold change effect is executed (see FIGS. 65 and 66), and is set in the effect flag table as described below. Depending on the contents of the flag, the execution of the background change effect may be canceled. Therefore, the execution ratio of the background change effect does not change directly depending on the winning determination result, but it can be said that it is indirectly influenced.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a process table selection process (step S8004) in the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 63) of the second embodiment. The process table selection process of the second embodiment is different from the process table selection process (FIG. 46) of the first embodiment in that the processes of steps S2051 to S2053, S2060, and step S2061 are increased. Steps S2054 and S2062 to S2065 are the same as steps S2045 and S2040 to S2043 of the process table selection process (FIG. 46) of the first embodiment. The process table selection process of the second embodiment will be specifically described below.

  Regarding this process table selection processing, (1) when the background change effect in the first special mode (clear sky mode) is to be executed as a continuous effect, the display result of the change display to start change is other than 15R jackpot If it is a big hit, the execution of the background change effect in the first special mode is canceled, and (2) the change starts when the background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is to be executed as a continuous effect. If the display result of the variable display to be displayed is a big hit other than the probable big hit, the execution of the background change effect in the second special mode is canceled, and (3) if none of the above applies, the first implementation As with the embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls to select a process table according to the state of the change pattern and the background change effect flag in the effect flag table. That. That is, it can be said that the first special mode (sunny mode) suggests a 15R jackpot, and the second special mode (lightning strike mode) suggests a promiscuous jackpot.

  The effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a jackpot designation (display results 2 to 6 designation) (step S2051). If the big hit is not specified (N in step S2051), the process proceeds to step S2062. On the other hand, if the jackpot is designated (Y in step S2051), it is confirmed whether or not the 15R jackpot is designated (display result 2 designation or display result 4 designation). If 15R big hit is designated (Y in step S2052), the process proceeds to step S2060. On the other hand, if the 15R big hit is not designated (N in step S2052), it is confirmed whether or not the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change display is set in the effect flag table (step S2053). If the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change display is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2053), the process proceeds to step S2060.

  On the other hand, when the 1st special mode flag corresponding to other than a change corresponding display is set in the production flag table (Y in Step S2053), the first change display is a big hit other than 15R. Since the background change effect of one special mode (clear sky mode) is about to be executed, the set first special mode flag is reset (step S2054), and the change does not become the background image of the first special mode. A process table corresponding to the pattern is selected (step S2055), and the process table selection process is terminated. Thus, in the case of a big hit in the variation display accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode, it is limited so as not to be a big hit other than 15R, and the variation accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode. If the display is a big hit, the 15R big hit will be confirmed.

  In step S2060, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a probable big hit designation (display results 4 to 6 designation). If the probability variation big hit is specified (Y in step S2060), the process proceeds to step S2062. On the other hand, if it is not the probability variation big hit designation (N in step S2060), it is confirmed whether or not the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the variation display is set in the effect flag table (step S2061). If the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the change display is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2061), the process proceeds to step S2062.

  On the other hand, when the second special mode flag corresponding to the display other than the fluctuation corresponding display is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S2061), the second special is displayed even though the fluctuation display to be started usually results in a big hit. Since the background change effect of the mode (lightning strike mode) is about to be executed, the set second special mode flag is reset (step S2054), and the variation pattern does not become the background image of the second special mode. A corresponding process table is selected (step S2055), and the process table selection process is terminated. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the variation display accompanied by the background change effect in the second special mode, the restriction is made so that the normal big hit is not made. If it is a big hit, the probability variation big hit will be fixed.

  In step S2062, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first special mode flag corresponding to the display other than the change correspondence display in the effect flag table is set (step S2062). When the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display of the effect flag table is set (Y in step S2062), the CPU 101 for effect control has a process corresponding to the change pattern and the background change effect of the first special mode. A table is selected (step S2063), and the process table selection process is terminated. Thereby, the background image of a production | presentation symbol becomes a 1st special mode (mode of a fine weather mode) in the variable display performed.

  When the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is not set (N in step S2062), the effect control CPU 101 performs the second special corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table. It is confirmed whether the mode flag is set (step S2064). When the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the variation corresponding display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S2064), the effect control CPU 101 performs a process according to the variation pattern and the background change effect of the second special mode. A table is selected (step S2065), and the process table selection process is terminated. Thereby, the background image of the effect symbol becomes the second special mode (the mode of the lightning strike mode) in the executed variable display.

  When the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the variation corresponding display of the effect flag table is not set (N in step S2064), the effect control CPU 101 uses the process table corresponding to the variation pattern that does not become the background image of the special mode. Is selected (step S2055), and the process table selection process is terminated.

  Thus, unlike the first embodiment, the continuous effect in the second embodiment is not a pre-read effect determined based on the command at the time of starting winning a prize, but when it is a big hit other than 15R, the first special mode The control for ending the background change effect of the second special mode is performed in the case of a normal big hit. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, as a result, in the case of a big win in the variable display with the background change effect of the first special mode, the 15R big hit is fixed, and the change with the background change effect of the second special mode is determined. If the display is a big hit, the probability variation big hit is fixed. Thereby, the player comes to expect that a big hit will be generated in the variable display accompanied by the background change effect, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the background image and improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the big win is determined in the start winning prize, the hold change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is determined that it is out of place, and the display result in the determination at the start of variation When is a big hit, the background change effect of the first special mode is executed only when it is determined that the 15R big hit. That is, it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is generated by the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to suggest whether or not the 15R big hit is caused by the background image. Therefore, both the display mode of the hold display and the background image Can effectively enhance the player's expectation and further enhance the interest.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the big win is determined in the start winning prize, the hold change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is determined that it is out of place, and the display result in the determination at the start of the variation. Is a big hit, the background change effect of the second special mode is executed only when it is determined to be a promising big hit. That is, since it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is generated by the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is likely to be caused by the background image, both the display mode of the hold display and the background image Can effectively enhance the player's expectation and further enhance the interest.

  In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the background change effect is not a look-ahead effect, and whether or not the background change effect is executed by confirming a symbol designation command or the like at the time of starting winning, The process of determining the effect mode when executing is eliminated. Therefore, the background change effect can be realized by simpler processing, and the control burden can be reduced.

  Finally, an embodiment different from the above embodiment is illustrated.

  In the first embodiment described above, when it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed in the determination at the time of the start winning prize, the background image is displayed in a special mode from the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display after the start winning prize) to be executed next. The example of changing to the first special mode or the second special mode) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the background image may be changed to a special mode from the change display executed later (change display after the first winning prize). Further, the background image may be changed to a special mode from the first variation display after the start winning prize, or the background image may be changed to a special mode from the second or subsequent variation display after the start winning prize. For example, it is preferable to determine at which timing the background image is changed to a special mode based on a random number. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the variable display that is the target of the background change effect, and the gameability can be improved.

  In addition, when it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed in the determination at the time of starting winning, the background image may be changed to a special mode in the variable display executed at the time of starting winning. That is, the background image may be changed to a special mode in the middle of the variable display that was being executed at the start winning timing. According to this, the interest at the time of starting winning a prize can be improved.

  In the first embodiment described above, when neither the on-hold change effect nor the background change effect is executed in the determination at the time of starting winning (step S1005 in FIG. 33), as shown in step S1020 in FIG. 34 and FIG. In addition, the example in which only one of the hold change effect and the background change effect can be executed with the variable display corresponding to the start winning as a target has been described, but not limited to this, the variable display corresponding to the start winning is displayed. You may be made to be able to perform both a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect as a target. For example, whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the manner in which it is executed and whether to execute the background change effect and the manner in which it is executed may be determined independently. Then, with the target variable display at the start winning prize as the target, only the hold change effect or the background change effect may be executed, or both the hold change effect and the background change effect are executed. You may be allowed to do so. In other words, both the on-hold change effect and the background change effect may be executable with a common variable display as a target.

  For example, in the processing corresponding to step S1020 in FIG. 34, whether or not to execute the hold change effect and whether to execute the background change effect and whether to execute the background change effect are independent of each other. It is preferable to move to step S1025 after the process of step S1023. According to this, there is a case where only the hold change effect is executed or only the background change effect is executed by targeting the variable display which is the determination target at the start winning prize, or the hold change effect and the background change. In some cases, both effects can be executed. Further, in place of the process of step S1033, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the hold change effect. If it is decided not to execute the hold change effect, a new hold display is usually displayed. When it is decided to execute the hold change effect, the new hold display may be displayed in the determined special mode (first special mode or second special mode). .

  In the first embodiment, the example of determining whether or not to execute the background change effect with the variable display corresponding to the start winning as a target in the determination at the time of starting winning is described. Not limited to this, at the time of start winning, whether or not to execute the background change effect with the change display executed before the change display corresponding to the start winning is determined, and the mode for executing the background change effect are determined. Also good. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the variable display that is the target of the background change effect, and the gameability can be improved.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 40, even when the determination result at the time of starting winning is out of place, the first special mode (clear sky mode) and the second special mode ( The example of determining to execute the background change effect in the lightning strike mode has been described. However, when the determination result at the time of the start winning prize is out of place, the ratio of executing the background change effect is further different according to the variable category command. You may make it let. For example, when the variation pattern type specified by the variation category command is super-reaching deviation (variation category 4), the background change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case of non-reach deviation (variation category 1). Also good.

  In the first embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the background change effect of the first special mode (clear sky mode) (Y in step S1026, Y in step S1052) and the determination result is a big hit other than 15R Is (Y in step S1027, Y in step S1054), the background change effect of the first special mode is terminated with the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination (steps S1208, S1055). As described above, the background change effect may be ended by the change display two or three times before the change display that is the object of the determination. In addition, it is determined not to execute the background change effect of the first special mode (sunny mode) and the background change effect of the first special mode (sunny mode) is executed, not only when the determination result is a big hit other than 15R. Even when the determination result is determined and the determination result is out of place, the background change effect may be ended with a variation display before the variation display that is the object of the determination at a predetermined ratio.

  In the first embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode) (N in step S1026, N in step S1052) and the determination result is a normal jackpot ( Y in step S1030, Y in step S1057), the background change effect in the second special mode is ended with the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination (steps S1031, S1058). However, the background change effect may be ended with the change display two or three times before the change display that is the object of the determination. In addition, it is decided not to perform the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode) and the determination result is usually a big hit, but to execute the background change effect of the second special mode (clear sky mode) Even when the determination result is out of the range, the background change effect may be ended with a variation display before the variation display subjected to the determination at a predetermined rate.

  In the second embodiment described above, an example has been described in which the flag corresponding to the effect mode of the background change effect is set (step S2026) in association with the reserved storage number before subtraction in the change start time determination process of FIG. According to this, the background change effect is executed for the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the reserved storage number before subtraction including the variable display related to the change start time determination process. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the background change effect may be executed for a variable display that exceeds the number of reserved memories before subtraction. For example, in step S2026, the first special mode flag or the second special mode flag that is not related to the number of reserved memories is set, and the period in which the first special mode flag or the second special mode flag is set is The process table may be selected so that the background image is in the first special mode or the second special mode.

  Here, for example, the timing at which the first special mode flag is reset is (1) a big hit other than 15R (a big hit of 5R or less in the above embodiment), and (2) a 15R big hit. The timing when the display result is derived and displayed, and the timing when the display result is derived and displayed by executing the variation display of the variation pattern with reach (normal reach or super reach) is preferable. . As a result, regardless of the number of stored memories when the background change effect is executed, (2) the fluctuation that becomes 15R jackpot until the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit other than 15R ends. The background change effect continues until the display ends or until (3) the variable display in which the display mode becomes the specific display mode (reach state) ends. As a result, for the player, if the background change effect is executed, the player will have the impression that the big hit or reach will be established regardless of the number of reserved memories at that time. It is possible to improve the interest of the background change effect that is executed regardless of the determination of the display result.

  Here, for example, the timing at which the second special mode flag is reset is (1) the timing before the start of the fluctuation display that is a normal big hit, and (2) the fluctuation display that is a probable big hit is executed and the display result is derived and displayed. And (3) the timing at which the display of the variation result with the reach (normal reach or super reach) is executed and the display result is derived and displayed. As a result, regardless of the number of reserved memories when the background change effect is executed, (2) the fluctuation display that becomes the probable variation big hit is (2) until the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that becomes the normal big hit ends. The background change effect is continued until the end or until (3) the variable display in which the display mode becomes the specific display mode (reach state) ends. As a result, for the player, if the background change effect is executed, the player will have the impression that the big hit or reach will be established regardless of the number of reserved memories at that time. It is possible to improve the interest of the background change effect that is executed regardless of the determination of the display result.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the background change effect of the first special mode is performed based on the fact that the predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the variable display accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode (clear sky mode) is executed. You may make it complete | finish. Further, in the second embodiment, the background change effect of the second special mode is performed based on the fact that the predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the change display accompanied with the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is executed. You may make it complete | finish.

  In the second embodiment described above, as illustrated in step S8003A of FIG. 63, the example of determining whether or not to execute the background change effect at the timing of starting the change display of the effect symbol has been described. As in the first embodiment, the background change effect is applied to the variation display (including the variation display corresponding to the start prize) until the variation display corresponding to the start prize is executed at the timing of the start prize. It may be determined whether or not to execute.

  In the above embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the pending change effect and the execution mode (first special mode (heat character mode) or second special mode (flame effect)) are suggested, and the background change effect is executed. Although the example which suggests a big hit type by presence / absence and execution mode (the 1st special mode (clear sky mode) and the 2nd special mode (lightning mode)) was explained, it is not restricted to such a form, The jackpot type may be suggested by the execution mode, and the possibility of jackpot may be suggested by the presence / absence of execution of the background change effect and the execution mode. For example, in the case of a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the first special mode, the 15R big hit is at a higher rate than the case of the big display in the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the normal mode or the second special mode. It is good to be. In addition, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the second special mode is a big hit, the probability change big hit is at a higher rate than the case of the big display in the variable display corresponding to the normal mode or the hold display of the first special mode. It is good to be. On the other hand, for example, the variable display with the background change effect in the first special mode becomes a big hit at a higher rate than the variable display without the background change effect, and the variable display with the background change effect in the second special mode is It is good to make it a big hit at a higher rate than the variable display accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode.

  In this way, it may be suggested whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol) by the continuous effect (for example, the background change effect) executed along with the plurality of variable displays, When the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display becomes the specific display result by changing the display mode of the hold display to a special mode (for example, the first special mode or the second special mode) different from the normal mode, It may be suggested whether or not to be controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, (1) It is determined whether or not a specific display result is obtained before determination by the start time determination means (before the start of variable display corresponding to the effective start winning) (change corresponding to the effective start winning at the time of effective starting winning) In addition to determining whether or not the display is a big hit (steps S220 to S222 in FIG. 19), and (2) if it is determined that a specific display result is obtained, the first specific gaming state (a big hit of 5R or less, a normal big hit) ) Or the second specific gaming state (15R big hit, probable big hit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state is further determined (judgment type determination (step S229 in FIG. 19)) (2) Corresponding to the hold information subject to the determination based on (2) the determination of whether to control the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state The display mode of the hold specific information that may be performed the display mode control to a special embodiment. And when performing such display mode control, you may make it perform a continuous production based on determination whether it becomes the specific display result at the time of the start winning shown by (1), You may make it perform a continuous production irrespective of determination of whether it becomes such a specific display result.

  It is good also as a structure which combined said 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. Specifically, there are cases where the background change effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning a prize as in the first embodiment, and there are cases where the background change is performed regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning a prize as in the second embodiment. There may also be cases where the production is performed. According to this, when the background change effect is executed, the player cannot grasp whether or not the background change effect is based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, and the interest is enhanced. it can.

  In the above embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 35 and the like, an example in which the execution ratio of the hold change effect is determined regardless of the hold memory number is described. Accordingly, the execution ratio of the hold change effect may be varied. For example, as the number of reserved memories increases, the rate at which the pending change effect is executed may be increased.

  In the above embodiment, “performing a predetermined process in one case at a higher rate than the other case” includes executing the predetermined process only in one case and performing the predetermined process in the other case. Includes not performing. For example, in the above embodiment, when the background change effect is being executed in the determination at the time of starting winning, the hold change effect is executed at a higher rate than when the background change effect is not being executed. As explained above, executing the hold change effect at this “high ratio” makes it possible to execute the hold change effect only when the background change effect is being executed, and holds when the background change effect is not being executed. This includes the case where the change effect is not executed. Further, for example, in the above embodiment, in the determination at the time of starting winning, when the hold change effect is executed, the background change effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold change effect is not executed. Although an example has been described, executing a background change effect at this “high rate” only allows a background change effect to be executed when the hold change effect is being executed, and when the hold change effect is not being executed. Includes the case where the background change effect is not executed.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the background change effect is not executed at a predetermined rate even when 15R big hit is described, but the background change effect is always executed when 15R big hit. You may make it do. In the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the background change effect is not executed at a predetermined rate even when the probability variation is a big hit. May be. Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display determined as the target of the background change effect at the time of the start winning is finished, the hold display corresponding to the variable display executed subsequently is displayed in a special manner. However, the example of continuing the background change effect has been described, but when the variable display determined to be the target of the background change effect at the time of winning the start is finished, the hold display corresponding to the variable display executed afterwards is a special mode. Even when the display is not displayed, the background change effect is continued at a predetermined rate, and when the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be executed subsequently is displayed in a special manner, The background change effect may be continued at a high rate.

  Similarly to the above, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect of the first special mode (clear sky mode) is executed in the determination at the time of starting winning, and when it is determined that the jackpot is other than 15R. Explained the example of ending the background change effect of the first special mode with the variable display executed before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, but not limited to this, it was determined that the big hit other than 15R Even in this case, the background change effect of the first special mode may be executed in the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and the execution ratio is lower than the case where it is determined that 15R big hit. It is good to be. Further, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is executed in the determination at the time of starting winning, and it is determined that the normal big hit, the starting winning is concerned. Although the example of ending the background change effect of the second special mode with the variable display executed before the variable display corresponding to the above has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when it is determined that the normal big hit, the start winning There is a possibility that the background change effect of the second special mode may be executed in the variable display corresponding to, and the execution ratio may be set lower than when it is determined that the probability change big hit.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, the first special mode flag corresponding to after the variable display is set in the determination when starting the variable display (the first special mode (clear sky mode)). When the display result of the variable display is determined to be a big hit other than 15R, the background change effect of the first special mode associated with the variable display is not executed. Although the example has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when it is determined that the jackpot is other than 15R, the background change effect of the first special mode may be executed in the variable display, and the execution It is preferable that the ratio be lower than when it is determined that 15R is a big hit. In the second embodiment, the second special mode flag corresponding to the subsequent display of the variable display is set in the determination when starting the variable display (the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode)). However, when the display result of the variation display is determined to be a big jackpot, the background change effect of the second special mode associated with the variation display is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the display result of the variable display is determined to be a normal jackpot, the background change effect of the second special mode may be executed in the variable display. It is preferable that the ratio be lower than when it is determined that the probability variation big hit.

  In the embodiment described above, the example in which the continuous effect accompanying the continuous variation display is the background change effect has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. An effect design aspect change effect that changes the display pattern of the effect symbol to a specific mode (for example, a specific character or character), or (2) a specific symbol that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is not a big hit symbol over a plurality of continuous variable displays The chance eye continuous stop effect that is a combination of performance symbols (for example, “112”, “123”, etc. (so-called “chance eyes”)), or (3) A countdown performance that displays the number of remaining fluctuation displays until the fluctuation display becomes (for example, “3 remaining”, “2 remaining”, “1 remaining”, “0 remaining”, etc.) Or, it may be (4) As the character object operation effect that a movable member provided on the periphery of the effect display device 9 for changing display of multiple successive (so-called "character object") is operated, is performed.

  In the above embodiment, when the number of reserved memories at the time of starting winning is 3 or more (first embodiment), or when the number of reserved memories before subtraction at the start of variation of the production symbol is 3 or more (second implementation) However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but the number of reserved memories at the time of starting winning a prize is 2 or more (first embodiment), or when the variation of the effect symbol starts. What is necessary is just to be performed with the continuous variable display of multiple times, such as when the number of reserved memories before subtraction is 2 or more (second embodiment).

  In the above embodiment, two types of jackpot types of 5R or less and 15R jackpot, and a combination of probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot are illustrated as a plurality of jackpot types having different advantages for the player. Not limited to, for example, a combination in which the period of control to the high base state after the end of the big hit gaming state is different (for example, the big hit in which the high base state is maintained until 30 fluctuation displays are executed and the 100 fluctuation display A jackpot combination that maintains a high base state until executed.

  In the above embodiment, with the control of the big hit gaming state (for example, when the big hit symbol is determined as the stop symbol in the effect symbol variation start process (step S8002), or the big hit symbol is stopped in the effect symbol variation stop process) When displayed (Y in step S863) or in the big hit end effect process (step S807), the set background change effect flag may be reset. Further, in the above embodiment, with the control to the big hit game state, referring to the symbol designation command and the variation category command in the start winning command storage area, the variation display executed thereafter is all out of place. If it is determined, the set background change effect flag may be reset. By doing so, the background change effect is executed within a predetermined number of fluctuation displays after the end of the big hit gaming state, but the game is enhanced by the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. It is possible to prevent the interest of the background from being lowered and to prevent the interest of the background change effect from being lowered.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, with the control to the big hit gaming state (for example, when the big hit symbol is determined as the stop symbol in the production symbol variation start process (step S8002), or the big hit symbol in the production symbol variation stop process) Is stopped (Y in step S863) or in the jackpot end effect process (step S807), the background change effect associated with the variable display related to the jackpot game state is not executed, and the start winning command The background change effect flag that has been set may be reset when it is determined that all of the variation displays executed thereafter are determined to be out of reference with reference to the symbol designation command or variation category command in the storage area. Further, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect is not executed even though it is determined that the big win is determined at the time of starting winning, the big hit gaming state related to the big win ends. Until it is done, it may not be determined that the background change effect is executed in the determination at the time of starting winning. By doing so, the background change effect is executed in the variable display in which the display result executed after that is not executed even though the background change effect is not executed in the variable display in which the display result is a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the background change effect from being impaired.

  In said embodiment, the timing which makes the display mode of a hold display a special mode (a 1st special mode or a 2nd special mode), a new hold display is made into the 1st hold memory display part 18c and the 2nd hold memory display part 18d. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the timing at which the display mode of the hold display is set to the special mode may be the timing after the new hold display is displayed. For example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect in the determination at the time of starting winning, a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and then the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold storage display unit 18d. The hold display may be changed to a special mode at the timing of shifting the hold display. Here, when a plurality of shifts are executed, a hold display is displayed at a timing according to any one of them (for example, one of the first shift timing, the second shift timing, or the third shift timing). It is better to change to a special mode.

  In addition, about each embodiment mentioned above, although the game machine (what is called a 1st type game machine) which transfers to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result of a special symbol and an effect design was demonstrated, it was provided in the game area. A gaming machine (so-called second type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on the winning of a gaming ball (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a variable winning ball apparatus (so-called role) Or it is good also as applying in the game machine which combined 1st type and 2nd type.

  Further, in each of the embodiments, it is possible to shift to the probability variation state based on the type of jackpot that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game moves to a probable change state, while the specific area is played during the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal state when does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the big hit type. For example, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening according to the big hit type. Specifically, a big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantial probable big hit) that allows a game ball to easily pass to a specific area, and a big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is set to a specific area. It is good also as a big hit (substantial non-probable big hit) that a sphere does not easily pass.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the variation is started in order to notify the variation control pattern 100 indicating the variation pattern such as the variation time, the type of reach production, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. to the production control microcomputer 100. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed according to commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to a plurality of types according to the operation of the operation lever by the player when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 27 Speaker 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 70 Audio | voice output board | substrate 560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and controls a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived as a display result,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling execution of the effect based on a command transmitted from the game control means,
The game control means includes
With respect to variable display that has not yet been started, hold storage means that can be stored as hold information;
Hold display means for displaying hold specific information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold storage means;
Start time determining means for determining whether or not to display a specific display result when starting variable display; and
Before-start determination means for determining whether or not the specific display result is obtained before determination by the start-time determination means;
Command transmission means for transmitting a variable display time command indicating a variable display time, a predetermined command, and a specific command based on the end of variable display;
Including state control means for controlling the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The production control means includes
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the determination result of the start time determining means and the variable display time command;
Based on the determination by the pre-start determination unit, a display mode control unit that sets the display mode of the hold specific information corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the determination as a special mode;
Including continuous production execution means capable of executing a continuous production in a plurality of variable displays,
When the display mode of the hold specific information is the special mode, the continuous effect is executed at a higher rate than when the display mode of the hold specific information is not the special mode,
The variable display execution means includes
When the variable display time command is normally received when controlled to the first gaming state, the variable display is executed even if the predetermined command is not normally received,
When the variable display time command is normally received when controlled to the second gaming state, variable display is executed on condition that the predetermined command is normally received, and the predetermined command When the game is not received normally and variable display is not executed, the identification information is replaced based on the reception of the specific command.

Images